Teriostar Maintenance Manual

LP-1010
Black-and-White Raster Plotter

Maintenance Manual
U00090001101
Seiko I Infotech Inc.
U00090001100
U00090001101
April 2005
January 2007
Seiko I Infotech 2005, 2007

Reprinting of this manual without permission is prohibited.
The content of this manual may be changed without notice.
is a registered trademark of Seiko Instruments Inc.
Ethernet is a registered trademark of Xerox, Inc.
HP is a registered trademark of Hewlett-Packard (U.S.A.)
Foreword
This manual contains the information necessary to conduct the primary maintenance for the
black-and-white raster plotter LP-1010 (hereinafter called the device) at the site.
The manual is intended for the maintenance personnel who have mastered assembly,
disassembly, and adjustment of the device. The responsible personnel will perform maintenance
operations using necessary tools and measuring instruments.
Before starting the intended maintenance operations, be sure to completely read "Safety
Precautions" and "Operational Precautions" described from the next page so that you can inspect
and maintain the deveice safely and correctly.
Safety Precautions
The following symbols are used in this manual to ensure the proper use of the plotter and to
prevent the plotter from being damaged.
Follow the instructions marked with these symbols.
WARNING
Serious personal injury or death:

Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this
symbol could result in serious personal injury or death.
CAUTION
Minor personal injury or product and/or peripheral

damage:
Failure to follow the guidelines marked with this
symbol could result in minor personal injury or
product and/or peripheral damage.
Example of symbols:
This symbol ( ) denotes items that require special care while executing a
certain procedure or operation.
This symbol ( ) denotes items that are forbidden.

The indication at left means that "Contact is prohibited."
This symbol (
injury.
) denotes items you should follow to prevent accidents or
ii
Warning
DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH VOLTAGE" label (transfer/
separator) attached as it may result in electric shock.
DO NOT touch any of the parts inside the plotter with a "HIGH TEMPERATURE" label
attached as it may result in severe burns.
DO NOT disassemble or remodel the plotter. DO NOT repair the plotter by yourself. Doing so
may cause fire, electric shock or other accidents.
DO NOT throw the toner cartridge or waste toner bottle into fire or place them near heat as they
could explode or catch fire leading to serious accidents and/or bodily injury.
Before replacing a maintenance component, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the power
cable from the power outlet. Failure to observe the instructions may result in electric shock.
DO NOT disconnect or connect the power cable with wet hands. Doing so may lead to electric
shock.
Caution
If the toner accidentally gets into the eye during the maintenance, wash it off with clean running
water instead of rubbing it and consult a doctor immediately. If the toner gets on the skin or
clothing, immediately wash it off with soapy water.
Pay attention not to get injured by a cutter or screwdriver during the maintenance and damage
the device.
In order to ensure the safe operation of the device heed all of the cautions and warnings contained
throughout this manual.
iii
Warning labels
Warning labels are affixed to this device at the locations shown in the following figure.
You should understand what these warning labels say and perform the inspection and
maintenance work.
3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label
4 "Gas spring
expiration date" label
2a "Caution when dealing with

paper jam" label
1 "Caution: high temperature" label
2b "Caution when dealing with paper jam" label
iv
1 "Caution: HIGH TEMPERATURE" label (affixed to the inside of the fixation door)
This label cautions you not touch this area due to high temperature. The fixation
device will become hot. Take care to avoid contact when dealing with paper jams.
2 "Caution when dealing with paper jams" label

This label indicates the direction that jammed paper should be pulled out when paper
is jammed in the fixation device. Follow the directions on the label to remove the
paper.
3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

This label cautions against contact due to high voltage application. As it is dangerous,
never contact this area.
4 "Gas spring expiration date" label

This caution label indicates the date when the gas spring is consumed, and the user
must replace the gas spring before the indicated date expires.
Precaution on Maintenance
Before and during the inspection and maintenance of the device, observe the following
precautions.
1 Before the intended inspection and maintenance, hear the condition and/or trouble of this
device from the user. Although the machine is sound, the user may use the toner/paper that
is not supplied by Seiko I Infotech (SIIT) or the data may be error. For this reason,
certainly verify the current situation and determine the cause of trouble, if any.
2 When disassembling the device to, for example, replace a component, you should
examine and know the machine configuration completely so that you can smoothly
reassemble the machine.
3 Ensure sufficient maintenance space.
4 Pay attentimon not to spill the fresh/waste toner. Before the intended inspection and
maintenance, spread a sheet or cloth on the floor to protect the floor mat from soiling.
5 Do not keep the top cover (clamshell) opened for a long period of time. Otherwise, the
exposure drum will be deteriorated due to photo-fatigue. Cover the drum with a black bag
when the clamshell is removed.
6 Do not touch the photodrum surface with bare hands. Otherwise, the drum will be
degraded. If you touch the surface, completely wipe it with a clean cloth such as Bencot.
The poor image quality brought from the bare-hand contact can be removed by outputting
about fifteen sheets of paper.
7 Do not open the top cover with the photodrum removed. Otherwise, the cleaner will
topple and the waste toner is spilled to soil the machine interior.
8 Do not get any ferromagnetic material such as bolt and washer close to the developing
sleeve. If the part is attracted by the magnet roll, be sure to remove it to prevent the drum
from being damaged.
9 Do not run the developing sleeve in the reverse direction.
vi
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Chapter 1
Chapter 2
Foreword
Safety Precautions
ii
Warning labels
iv
Precaution on Maintenance
vi
Maintenance Work Procedure
1-1
1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure
1-1
1.2 Necessary Tools
1-3
1.3 External View and Nomenclatures
1-3
1.4 Maintenance Space
1-7
1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware

1.5.1 Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card
1.5.2 Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card
1.5.3 Other Version Upgrade Operations
1.5.4 Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade
1.5.5 Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card
1.5.6 Explanation of Maintenance CF Card
1.5.7 Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center
1.5.8 Version Upgrade by Web Browser
1.5.9 Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol
1-9
1-9
1-11
1-11
1-13
1-17
1-19
1-19
1-21
1-23
Engine Maintenance Mode
2-1
2.1 Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation

2.1.1 Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode
2.1.2 Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel
2-2
2-2
2-3
2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu
2-4
CONTENTS-1
2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter Oper2.3

Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus
2-6
2.3.1 Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance)
2-6
2.3.2 Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information)
2-10
2.3.3 Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING" (part cleaning information)
2-13
2.3.4 Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log) 2-16
2.3.5 Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log)
2-20
2.3.6
2.3.7
2.3.8
2.3.9
2.3.10
2.3.11
2.3.12
2.3.13
2.3.14
Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor)

Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor)
Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator)
Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test)
Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print)
Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment)
Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter)
Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM)
Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER"
(User-defined engine parameter)
2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width)
2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG"
(Process Cartridge Consumption Log)
2.4 Message
Chapter 3
CONTENTS-2
Maintenance Person Mode
2-23
2-26
2-28
2-32
2-37
2-42
2-51
2-59
2-62
2-66
2-70
2-7
3-1
3.1 Enter to Maintenance Person Mode
3-1
3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus
3-3
3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web
3-5
3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions
3-5
Chapter 4
Regular Inspection
4.1 Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure
Chapter 5
Troubleshooting (Controller Error)
4-1
4-2
5-1
5.1 Type of Error Messages
5-1
5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error
5-2
5.3 Operator Notice Warning
5-3
5.4 Warning
5.4.1 Communication Error
5.4.2 PDL Warning
5.4.3 Engine Warning
5.4.4 Main Warning
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-8
5-8
5.5 Service Call Error

5.5.1 Engine Error
5.5.2 System Error
5.5.3 Controller Error
5-9
5-9
5-9
5-9
5.6 Error Log

5.6.1 Classification of Error/Warning
5.6.2 Format of Message
5.6.3 Log Registration Format
5.6.4 Error Log Print Item
5.6.5 Type of Error Log
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-13
5-14
5-14
5.7 Error Log Classification List
5-16
5.8 Job Log

5.8.1 Job Log Print Item
5-17
5-17
CONTENTS-3
Chapter 6
Chapter 7
Chapter 8
5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board)
5-19
5.10 Serial Number Unset
5-20
Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)
6-1
6.1 How to Read This Manual

6.1.1 Overview of Engine Troubleshooting
6.1.2 Terminology
6-1
6-1
6-3
6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting

6.2.1 Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description
6.2.2 Paper Jam Error Codes and Description
6-5
6-5
6-6
6.3 Leve-2 Troubleshooting

6.3.1 "Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting
6.3.2 "Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting
6.3.3 Troubleshooting by symptom
6-7
6-7
6-15
6-27
Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)
7-1
7.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Method

7.1.1 Type of Engine Test Patterns
7-1
7-2
7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure

7.2.1 Plotting Specification and Measuring Method
7.2.2 Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure
7-4
7-4
7-6
7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure
7-7
Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.1 How to Read This Manual
8.1.1 Rules for Disassembly/Assembly
8.1.2 Covers
CONTENTS-4
8-1
8-1
8-1
8-2
8.2 Replacing the Parts

8.2.1 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board)
8.2.2 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board)
8.2.3 Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board)
8.2.4 Replacing the Controller Fan
8.2.5 Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor
8.2.6 Replacing the Cutter Unit
8.2.7
8.2.8
8.2.9
8.2.10
8.2.11
8.2.12
8.2.13
8.2.14
8.2.15
8.2.16
8.2.17
8.2.18
8.2.19
8.2.20
8.2.21
8.2.22
8.2.23
8.2.24
8.2.25
8.2.26
8.2.27
8.2.28
8.2.29
8.2.30
8.2.31
8.2.32
8.2.33
8.2.34
8-3
8-3
8-9
8-10
8-11
8-13
8-13
Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit

Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit
Replacing the Power Switch
Replacing the Filter
Replace the waste toner bottle switch and the waste toner sensor.
Replacing the Fixation Unit
Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY
Replacing the Main Motor
Replacing the Transport (suction).
Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit
Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan)
Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation
Replacing the Fan on Fuser
Replacing the Charger Fan
Replacing the Process Unit
Replacing the LED Head
Replacing the Transfer Separator
Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY (charge elimination LED)
Replacing the Developer
Replacing the Developer DV Spacer
Replacing the Developer Blade
Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch)
Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch)
Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor
Replacing the Manual Feed Sensor
Replacing the Control Panel
Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02)
Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit
(PS11, PS12, PS21, PS22, PS31, and PS32)
8.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring
8.2.36 Replacing the heat roller
8-19
8-20
8-21
8-23
8-23
8-25
3-30
3-33
3-34
3-36
3-37
3-38
3-39
3-40
3-42
3-43
3-47
3-48
3-49
3-52
3-53
3-55
3-56
3-57
3-58
3-59
3-60
3-62
3-63
8-64
CONTENTS-5
8.2.37
8.2.38
8.2.39
8.2.40
8.2.41
Chapter 9
CONTENTS-6
Replacing the backup roller

Cleaning Primary Wire
Exchanging Primary Wire
Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade
Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum
Adjustment
8-67
8-69
8-72
8-76
8-80
9-1
9.1 Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit
9.1.1 Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current
9.1.2 Developer AC Bias
9.1.3 Developer DC Bias
9.1.4 Transfer Load Current
9.1.5 Separator AC Bias
9-1
9-2
9-3
9-4
9-5
9-6
9.2 Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit
9-7
9.3 Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head
9-8
9.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items

9.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure
9.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack
9.4.3 Adjusting the Cut Squareness
9.4.4 Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy
9.4.5 Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy
9.4.6 Adjusting the Top Edge Registration
9.4.7 Adjusting the Center Registration
9-9
9-10
9-11
9-14
9-15
9-17
9-19
9-21
9.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space
9-24
9.6 Adjusting the LED Head Joint
9-25
Chapter 10 Operational Description
10-1
10.1 Features
10-2
10.2 Engine Specifications
10-3
10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part
10-4
10.4 Basic Operation (Overall Operation)

10.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration
10.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration
10.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram
10.4.4 Outline of Operations
10-5
10-5
10-6
10-8
10-9
10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation

10.5.1 Primary Charging
10.5.2 Photosensitive Drum
10.5.3 Exposure
10.5.4 Development
10.5.5 Transfer
10.5.6 Separation
10.5.7 Cleaning
10.5.8 Charge Elimination
10.5.9 Fusing
10-11
10-11
10-12
10-13
10-14
10-15
10-16
10-16
10-17
10-17
10.6 Operation of Drive and Feed Systems

10.6.1 Drive System
10.6.2 Paper feed system
10-19
10-19
10-19
10.7 Control System

10.7.1 Process Control
10.7.2 Paper Feed Control
10-21
10-21
10-21
10.8 Controller
10.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications
10.8.2 Hardware Configuration
10.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart
10-22
10-22
10-23
10-24
CONTENTS-7
Appendix A MEC Board Setup and LED Indication
A-1
A.1 Setting the DIP Switches

A.1.1 Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4)
A.1.2 Setting DIP Switch SW2 on MEC Board
A.1.3 Setting DIP Switch SW3 on MEC Board
A-1
A-1
A-2
A-2
A.2 LED Indication

A.2.1 LED indication on MEC board
A-3
A-3
A.3 Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board
A-6
Appendix B RFU Board Setup

B.1 Setup of DIP Switch
B.1.1 DIP Switch on the RFU Board
Appendix C Setup MRC2 Board Setup

C.1 Setup of DIP Switches
C.1.1 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7)
C.1.2 DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2)
C.1.3 DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board
C.1.4 DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board
B-1
B-1
B-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-1
C-2
C-2
Appendix D Menu Structure
D-1
Appendix E Electrical Connection Diagram
E-1
CONTENTS-8
Tables
Table 1-1
Table 1-2
Table 1-3
Table 1-4
Table 1-5
Table 1-6
Table 1-7
Necessary Tool List

Other Version Upgrade List
CF Card Version Upgrade Error List
CF Card Version Upgrade Error List
Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List
Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List
Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List
1-2
1-11
1-14
1-15
1-15
1-16
1-16
Table 2-1
Table 2-2
Table 2-3
Table 2-4
Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List

Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes
Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes
Engine Control Parameter List
2-4
2-19
2-22
2-53
Table 4-1
Regular Inspection Item List
Table 5-1
Table 5-2
Table 5-3
Table 5-4
Table 5-5
Table 5-5
Table 5-6
Table 5-7
Table 5-8
Table 5-9
Table 5-10
Table 5-11
Table 5-12
Table 5-13
Table 5-14
Table 5-15
Table 5-16
Table 5-17
If a Job has been Left at Powering on

Ethernet Warning List
Mail Warning List
USB Warning List
PDL Warning List
PDL Warning List
Engine Control Warning List
List of Main Warnings
PDL Module Error List
Engine Control Module Error List
Operation Module Error List
Main Module Error List
Setup Error List
Panel Control Module Error List
Spool Module Error List
Error Log Print Item
Error Log Classification List
Job Log Print Item
4-2
5-4
5-5
5-5
5-6
5-6
5-7
5-8
5-8
5-9
5-10
5-10
5-11
5-11
5-12
5-12
5-14
5-16
5-17
CONTENTS-9
Table 6-1
Table 6-1
Table 6-2
Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (1/2)

Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes (2/2)
Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes
6-4
6-5
6-6
Table 7-1
Table 7-2
Engine Test Pattern List

Image Quality Defects List
7-2
7-7
Table 8-1
Maintenance Priority
Table 9-1
Table 9-2
Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value
Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure
Table 10-1
Symbol Table
CONTENTS-10
8-69
9-8
9-9
10-7
Figures
Figure 1-1
Figure 1-2
Figure 1-3
Figure 1-4
Figure 1-5
Figure 1-6
Figure 1-7
Figure 1-8
Figure 1-9
Figure 1-10
Maintenance Work Procedure Flow

External View and Nomenclatures (Front)
External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear)
External View and Nomenclatures (Interior)
External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel)
Maintenance Space
Card Slot on Device
Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade
Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card
Extract File Configuration
Figure 8-1
Nomenclatures of Covers
Figure 10-1
Figure 10-2
Figure 10-3
Figure 10-4
Figure 10-5
Figure 10-6
Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

Block Diagram - Basic Configuration
Overview of Device Configuration Drawing
Configuration Block Diagram
Controller Block Diagram
Data Processing Flowchart
1-1
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
1-17
1-18
1-19
8-2
10-4
10-5
10-6
10-8
10-23
10-24
CONTENTS-11
Chapter 1 Maintenance Work Procedure
Chapter 1
Maintenance Work Procedure
Chapter 1 describes the primary maintenance work procedure, necessary tools, and names of
components of this device.
Also, subsection 1.5 describes a method for updating the version of the system firmware.
1.1
Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure
The maintenance work is classified into the regular checking maintenance based on the
Maintenance Agreement and the maintenance if a trouble occurs.
The work procedure flows of respective cases are shown in Figure 1-1.
Start
Regular check/In
case of a trouble
Regular checking
maintenance
Maintenance if a
trouble occurs
Grasp the situations (problems, complaints,

etc.) of the device.
Check the contents of trouble and the

situations if a trouble occurs.
Check and clean the parts (See Chapter 4)

Replace parts as necessary (See Chapter 8)
Perform the troubleshooting.

If controller is error (See Chapter 5)
or adjust (See Chapter 9).
If engine is error (See Chapter 6)

If image quality is poor (See Chapter 7)
Check by plotting that no problem occurs.
Replace a faulty part (See Chapter 8)

Adjust the replaced part or make adjustment
as necessary (See Chapter 9)
End
Check that the trouble is removed.
End
Figure 1-1 Maintenance Work Procedure Flow
1-1
1.2
Necessary Tools
Table 1-1 lists tools and measuring instruments necessary for the maintenance.
Table 1-1 Necessary Tool List
Name
CF card
Phillips screwdriver
1 pc
1pc each
Remarks
- To write various types of information
- To save system files
No. 2 magnetized screwdriver
(stem length: 100 mm and 200 mm)
No. 3 magnetized screwdriver
Stubby screwdriver (stem length: 38 mm)
Box screwdriver
1pc
5.5-mm hexagonal bit type
Flat blade screwdriver
1pc
For removing E-rings.
Voltage adjustment screwdriver
1pc
CERAMIC ALIGNER SCREWDRIVER DA-58/+
C snap ring tool
1 pc
Hexagonal wrench
1pc each 1.5 mm, 2 mm, 2.5 mm, 3 mm, 4 mm, 5 mm, 6 mm
Radio pliers
1pc
Nippers
1pc
Insulock tie
1-2
Quantity
For cutting Insulock tie.
Scale
1pc
Cutter
1pc
Digital multi-meter
1pc
For measuring each various power measures. (30900-0926)
Cleaning kit
1 set
For cleaning the interior (Ethanol and cotton swabs )
Vacuum cleaner
1 pc
For cleaning the interior (For toner and handy type)
Tweezers
1pc
For cleaning and/or replace wires.
Waste
Cotton cloth
For cleaning the drum. (30790-0103)
Heat roller cleaner
For cleaning fixation roller (heat) and roller (backup).
Contact grease FLOIL FG-60H
For greasing lubricates fixation ring (bias).
1.3
External View and Nomenclatures
Figures 1-2 to 1-5 respectively show the external view and nomenclatures of the device.
1 Roll 1 drawer (door 1)

2 Roll 2 drawer (door 2)
3 Manual feed drawer (door 4)
4 Paper unfeeding outlet
5 Top door (door 6)
6 Fixation door (door 7)
7 Manual paper feed holder (door 8)
8 Manual feed inlet
9 Toner cover
0 Control panel
A Waste toner bottle door
Figure 1-2 External View and Nomenclatures (Front)
1-3
1 Main power switch

2 Power cord
3 Parallel interface connector
4 USB interface connector
5 Ethernet interface connector
6 Cutter door (door 5)
7 Cutter inside door (door 9)
8 Cutter door lower small window (door 10)
Figure 1-3 External View and Nomenclatures (right side / rear)
1-4
1 Paper feed knob

2 Paper flange
Figure 1-4 External View and Nomenclatures (Interior)
1-5
2LCD
The status of this device, as well as a
menu to set the device functions
appear on a 20- digit, 2-line display.
1LEDs
The device status is indicated
by LEDs on, flashing, and off.
3Keys
Use these keys to set device
functions.
Figure 1-5 External View and Nomenclatures (Control Panel)
1-6
Maintenance Space
300
600
Figure 1-6 shows the spaces necessary to maintain the device.
600
700
900
1652
552
700
1154
2052
300
800
1.4
2054
2554
Installation space
(Dimension of height : 2000 mm)

Maintenance space
(Unit: mm)
Figure 1-6 Maintenance Space
1-7
1.5
Version Upgrade of System Firmware
This section describes how to version upgrade the system firmware of the device. The device is
equipped with multiple firmware items. It is possible to version upgrade items collectively.
1.5.1
Version Upgrade by Version upgrade CF Card

The version upgrade CF card is used to upgrade all firmware versions collectively. (This card is
common to plotter and MF models.)
<Version-upgrade applies to the following firmware:>
- Controller firmware
- Engine firmware
- Scanner firmware (used in MF model)
<Procedures>
1
2
3
Turn on the device and execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list.
Turn off the device.
Insert the version upgrade CF card into the controller CF card slot. Check DIP
switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.)
DIP switch for version upgrade.

Version upgrade: bit 1=OFF, 2=OFF
OFF 1
Figure 1-7 Card Slot on Device
1-8
Card slot
Turn on the device.

In the version upgrade process, the old firmware version is automatically erased and
the new version is written in the device. After the start is booted correctly, the first
screen appears on the LCD and the process is initiated.
LCD displayed
S Y S T EM
COP Y
S Y S T EM COP Y
COP Y I NG X X X X X X ( N o t e 1 )
Note 1: Description of XXXXXXX

During the version upgrade,
"ENGINE" is displayed for
engine firmware.
"SCANNER" is displayed for
S Y S T E M CO P Y
S - ERA S I NG
X X X ( N o t e 2)
scanner firmware.
"SYSTEM" is displayed for
controller firmware.
Note 2: The down-counter for
S Y S T EM COP Y
WR I T I N G X X X
S Y S T EM COP Y
COP Y F I N I SHED
5
6
7
8
copying or erasing the

controller firmware is
displayed.
Normal termination
Press the Power key for several seconds to turn it off.

Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot.
Turn on the device to reboot the system.
Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the system firmware is
correctly version-upgraded.
Note:
Note:
Note:
For the MF model, the scanner firmware is not rewritten if its version is
same as that registered to the device.
If the engine firmware version is the same as or older than the one registered
to the device, the overwrite process is not executed.
The version-upgrade of the controller firmware is executed unconditionally.
1-9
1.5.2
Version Upgrade by Maintenance CF Card

The maintenance CF card can version upgrade individual firmware items one by one. The
version-upgrade using this card is executed by the control panel operation.
(1) LP-1010 version upgrading operation (maintenance open)
<Procedures>
1
2
3
4

Insert the maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot.
Check DIP switches 1 and 2 are both in OFF position. (Default is OFF position.)
Turn on the device.
Access the FUNCTION menu, specify the target firmware item, and upgrade its
version.
system.bin: Total system (controller firmware + engine firmware)
Pxxxxx.bin: RIP controller firmware (xxxxxx: version)
Exxxxx.bin: Engine firmware (xxxxxx: version)
Sxxxxx.bin: Scanner firmware (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)
Control panel (example of controller firmware version upgrade )
# V ERS I ON
U PGR ADE
* s y s t em . b i n
s y s t em ( 0 1 A )
,
*E1_01 . b i n
eng i ne ( 1 . 01 )
*E1_01 . b i n
OK?
*E1_01 . b i n
COP Y I NG ENG I NE
*E1_01 . b i n
COP Y F I N I SHE D
1-10
5
6
7
1.5.3

Pull out the maintenance person CF card from the controller CF card slot.
Other Version Upgrade Operations

If addition to the utilization of version upgrade and maintenance CF cards, it is possible to
upgrade firmware versions as shown in Table 1-2 by using version upgrade DIP switches of the
device. Once DIP switches are set, procedures are the same as normal batch version upgrade
process.
* In this version upgrade, only the control firmware version, including BOOT ROM, can be upgraded.
Table 1-2 Other Version Upgrade List
(Note 1)
(Note 2)
DSW1
DSW2
Description
OFF
OFF
Upgrades all firmware versions in the device

collectively. (Normal version upgrade operation)
ON
OFF
Upgrades only the controller firmware version.
OFF
ON
Upgrades only controller firmware and BOOT ROM

versions.
ON
ON
Rewrites only the complete controller data, including

BOOT ROM. (Setup area is initialized.)
After the version-upgrade, be sure to return DIP switches 1 and 2 to OFF position.
Batch version up of each firmware mentioned above cannot be executed with the CF card for maintenance.
(DSW1, 2 = OFF, OFF)
<Procedures>
1
2

Insert the version-upgrade or maintenance CF card into the controller CF card slot.
Move DIP switches 1 and 2 to necessary positions according to the purpose (see Table
1-2.)
* Correct system file must exist in the /sys holder of each card.
Turn on the device.
The version upgrade is automatically initiated. During the process, the LCD changes
the display as shown below.
1-11
LCD displayed
S T AR T I NG
LOAD I NG
VE R - U P
S Y S T EM
COP Y I NG S Y S T EM
S Y S CO P Y S T A R T
S - ERA S I NG x x x
COP Y I NG
WR I T I N G
4
5
6
7
1-12
S Y S T EM
xx x
COP Y F I N I SHED
Normal termination (DSW, 2=ON, OFF)
COP Y F I N I SHED - B T
Normal termination (DSW, 2=OFF, ON)
COP Y F I N I SHED - A L
Normal termination (DSW, 2=ON, ON)

Pull out the version upgrade CF card from the controller CF card slot.
Execute MENU PRINT to output the setup list and check the target firmware is
correctly version-upgraded.
1.5.4
Errors during CF Card Version Upgrade

If an error message appears during the CF card version upgrade take actions according to Table
1-3.
CFCARD
nn n n
nnnn: Error code
T ECHCARD
nnnn
nnnn: Error code
1-13
Table 1-3 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List

Error code
Measure (for maintenance person)
0001
Erasing the flash memory chip is

unsuccessful.
Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error

recurs or the device is not booted, replace the
MRC2 board.
0002
Erasing the flash memory sector is

unsuccessful.

MRC2 board.
0003
Flash memory write timeout occurs.

MRC2 board.
0004
Flash memory write verify error occurs.

MRC2 board.
0050
The system image in the CF card is not V e r s i o n u p g r a d e t h e f i r m w a r e a g a i n u s i n g t h e

c o m p a t i b l e w i t h t h e d e v i c e . ( M a g i c correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,
number unmatch)
replace the MRC2 board.
0051
Version upgrade the firmware again using the

The system image in the CF card does not
correct version upgrade CF card. If the error recurs,
contain kernel.
0053

T h e s y s t e m i m a g e i n t h e C F c a r d i s correct version upgrade CF card that contains
partially destroyed. (CRC error)
correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the
MRC2 board.
0054

The system image in the CF card is not c o r r e c t v e r s i o n u p g r a d e C F c a r d t h a t c o n t a i n s
compatible with the device.
MRC2 board.
0055

The system image in the CF card is not
correct version upgrade CF card that contains
compatible with the device. (The image
size is too large.
MRC2 board.
0056

The file in the CF card does not contain c o r r e c t v e r s i o n u p g r a d e C F c a r d t h a t c o n t a i n s
system image. (System comparison error) correct system image. If the error recurs, replace the
MRC2 board.
0100
The version upgrade process is terminated Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
due to short device memory capacity.
recurs, replace the MRC2 board.
0101
0052
1-14
Error name and description
With the DSW1 and DSW2 on the board of this

device set in OFF and ON positions respectively (or
DSW1: ON, DSW2: ON), and use the CF card that
T h e v e r s i o n u p g r a d e f i r m w a r e o f t h e contains correct system image to version upgrade
the firmware again.
device is faulty.
If the error recurs or the device is not booted,
Set DIP switches 1 and 2 on the board to ON and
OFF positions, respectively, and version upgrade
T h e s y s t e m i m a g e i s n o t w r i t t e n t o t h e the firmware again. If the error recurs or the device
is not booted, replace the MRC2 board.
flash memory of the MRC2 board.
(Note: The CF card must contain controller system
file (file name: system.bin).)
Table 1-4 CF Card Version Upgrade Error List

Error code
0200
With the DSW1 and DSW2 on the board of this

device set in OFF and ON positions respectively (or
DSW1: ON, DSW2: ON), version upgrade the
The version-upgrade of BOOT ROM is
firmware again. If the error recurs or the device is
unsuccessful.
not booted, replace the MRC2 board.
(Note: The CF card must contain controller system
file (file name: system.bin).)
0080
Edit the cardid.dat file in the CF card correctly. To

The card recognition file (cardid.dat) in the
this end, write the following string to the file.
CF card age is not correct.
SYSTEM:LSP:1.00
0081
CF card read error occurs.
Turn off the device remove the CF card once and

reinsert it, turn on the machine, and versionupgrade the firmware again. If the error recurs,
0082
CF card system image open error occurs.
Turn off the device remove the CF card once and

reinsert it, turn on the machine, and versionupgrade the firmware again.
If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.
0083
The CF card is not inserted into the slot.
Turn off the device insert the CF card into the slot
correctly, turn on the machine, and version upgrade
the firmware again.
0084
CF card is not correctly mounted.
Turn off the device insert the CF card into the slot
correctly, turn on the machine, and version upgrade
the firmware again.
If the error recurs, replace the MRC2 board.
Table 1-5 Engine F/W Version Upgrade Error List

Error code
0171
An unrecoverable error occurs on the Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
engine side.
recurs, replace the MEC board.
017B

Version upgrade is executed using any other
file than engine firmware file.
replace the MRC board.
017C
Contents of engine flash memory cannot Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
be erased.
017D
W r i t e t o e n g i n e f l a s h m e m o r y i s Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error

unsuccessful.
017E
Engine firmware checksum error occurs.

replace the MRC board.
1-15
Table 1-6 Errors during Scanner Firmware Version Up List

Error code
0009

Version up is disabled on the scanner side
recurs, replace the MSC2 board.
001D
Communication error occurred between Version upgrade the firmware again. If the error
controller and scanner during version up.
101D
Writing to the scanner flash memory failed

0101
The scanner flash memory was destroyed.

Table 1-7 Errors during CF Card Version Up (for TECHCARD only) List
Error code
1-16
1001
CF card does not exist, or it is not

recognized
Insert CF card correctly.
1002
CF card type is incorrect
Insert correct CF card (TECHCARD)
1003
Corresponding file is not found in CF card
Insert CF card in which the system files are stored.
1004
Corresponding file in CF card is illegal.
Check if the system files are destroyed, and insert

CF card that stores correct system files.
1100
Correct folder does not exist, or files are not Store system files in correct folder, or insert CF
recognized correctly.
card already checked for correction operation.
1.5.5
Explanation of Version Upgrade CF Card

The version upgrade CF card contains the total system file where all firmware items of the device
are assembled into a single package. For this reason, it is possible to upgrade all firmware
versions collectively.
(1) Directory configuration in card

The version upgrade CF card supports two directories, each of which contains the information
file as shown below.
1 sys directory
The version upgrade total system file (system.bin) exists in the / sys directory. The size of this
system file is about 3 MB and only one system file is contained in it. If the / sys director does
not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when the version-upgrade CF card
is used.
2 cardid directory
The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the version upgrade card exsists in the
\cardid directory. If the ID code of the version upgrade card does not exist in the \cardid
directory, the version-upgrade card is not recognized. The ID code consists of "SYSTEM,"
"machine name," and "version."
Example: SYSTEM:LSP:1.00
1
sys
2
cardid
Figure 1-8 Directory Configuration in CF Card Version Upgrade
1-17
1.5.6
Explanation of Maintenance CF Card

The maintenance CF card is used to upgrade individually each firmware installed the device.
Multiple firmware files can be registered in the sys directory.
(1) Configuration of card directories

The maintenance CF card supports two directories, each of which contains information files or
file as shown below.
1 sys directory
The following version upgrade system files exists in the sys directory.
Total system file:
RIP controller firmware:
Engine firmware:
Scanner firmware:
system.bin
Pxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version)
Exxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version)
Sxxxxx.bin (xxxxxx: version) (for MF model)
If the /sys directory does not exist, the version upgrade process is not executed even when
the maintenance CF card is used.
2 cardid directory
The file (cardid.dat) that contains the ID code of the maintenance card exsists in the /cardid
directory.
If the ID code of the maintenance card does not exist in the /cardid directory, the maintenance
card is not recognized. The ID code consists of "TECH," "machine name," and "version."
(Here, "version" shows that of the total system file.)
Example: TECH:LSP:1.00
1
sys
2
cardid
Figure 1-9 Directory Configuration of Maintenance CF Card
1-18
1.5.7
Creation Method of Maintenance CF Card in Service Center

Version upgrade and maintenance CF cards respectively contain information directories that
maintain IDs, firmware versions, and system images. The file that contains these information
directories in the compressed form is provided to individual service centers so that CF cards can
be created in each office. (To execute the online version-upgrade, use the system.bin file on the
sys directory.)
(1) How to create the version-upgrade CF card
<Procedures>
1
2
3
4
Prepare a CF card writer. (Commercially available product is acceptable.)

Prepare the card formatted in FAT16 or FAT32. (FAT16 is recommended. Formatted
cards are commercially available.)
Prepare and extract the data compressed file discussed above. Directories and files are
loaded to the PC. (See Figure 1-10.)
Using the card writer, copy /sys and /cardid directories to the CF card. If the fresh CF
card is used, it is not necessary to format it with the PC.
- Cardid and sys directories must always be copied to the CF card.
/LP1010-01A
/sys
/cardid
Figure 1-10 Extract File Configuration
1-19
1.5.8
Version Upgrade by Web Browser

Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version
upgrade by the Web browser from the host computer.
As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use
the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory.
The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade using the "system.bin" file.
<Procedures>
1
2
3
1-20
Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin)
Using the "remote-control startup procedures" described in the User's guide allows the
browser to display the plotter's Web screen.
Click "Maintenance" in the left menu list to open the Maintenance window.
On the left menu list, enter the following maintenance password into the Password box
and click [Login].

CSCCSUDR (8 half-size characters)
5 Clicking Special Maintenance, the third menu on the Maintenance window, will open
the Special Maintenance window. There is no task on this window. Click Next.
6 Use the View button at the center of the System Change window to select the prepared
RIP system. Click Send to Printer. It takes several seconds until the next screen
appears after the data transfer is started. The initiation of data transfer is indicated on
the operation panel of the device.
7 Check the system version on the System Change window and, if it is OK, click
System Change. (The run time is about 3 to 4 minutes.)
8 When the next screen appears, the version upgrade procedures through the browser are
completed. Upon completion of version upgrade procedures, the device is rebooted
automatically.
Note: If the plotter is turned off during the system firmware version-upgrade
process, contents of the flash memory are broken and resultantly the device
cannot be booted correctly. If this is your case, it is necessary to write the
system firmware from the CF card to the flash memory and upgrade system
firmware versions from the host computer again. Pay special attention when
the machine is away from the computer.
Note: Use the Netscape Communicator 4.5 or later or Internet Explorer 4.5 or
later.
(1) Error
Following errors may be displayed on the host computer.
The downloaded file did not pass the header check.
Cause: An error occurred during the download.
Type of error: File format error
The plotter acknowledged NG against the version-upgrade request.
Cause: An error occurred during the download.
Type of error: The version upgrade rejection error
An error occurred during the CRC check.
Cause: The system file is damaged.
Corrective action: Download the system file again and retry the CRC check. When the error
recurs, consult the supplier.
1-21
1.5.9
Version Upgrade by FTP Protocol

Besides the system version upgrade by the CF card, this device enables the online version
upgrade by the FTP protocol from the host computer.
As the firmware for version upgrade, extract the compressed file for creating the CF card and use
the "system.bin" file saved in the "sys" directory.
The following gives a procedure for the batch version upgrade the "system.bin" file.
<Procedures>
1
2
3
4
Prepare the system file for the network controller firmware. (Example: system.bin)
Enter the plotter IP address to log in the device.
Enter the user name. Furthermore, enter the password "downloading."
Use the "put" command to send the system file of the network controller firmware to
the plotter.
* Example of operation on Personal computer.

> ftp <lp-1010 lp address>
Name: downloading
Password: downloading
ftp>bin
ftp>put <System file F/W file name>
ftp>quit
>
Enter the plotter IP address. (xxx.xxx.xxx.xxx)

User name prepared for downloading the system
(down loading)
Enter the same string as the user name
(i.e. "downloading").
Change the binary mode.
Enter the system file name (system.bin).
Completed ftp protocol.
Upon completion of version-upgrade, use the "quit" command to quit the "ftp"
command. This device is automatically rebooted.
(1) Error
Following errors may be displayed on the host computer.
When the plotter is occupied by other user, the following error message appears.
421 Service not available, closing control connection (XXXX).
XXXX: 0001 -- Either netd, centroD, or testD is working.
0002 -- The device is not in idle state (i.e. the plotter is under operation.)
When the version-upgrade process is failed, the following error message appears.
553 Requested action not taken (XXXX).
XXXX: 001 -- The file is not normally formatted.
002 -- CRC check error (before writing to the flash memory)
003 -- CRC check error (after writing to the flash memory)
004 -- Flash write error
005 -- The file is transferred in the ASCII mode.
**** -- Either error code listed on pages 1-13 and 1-14 is displayed.
1-22
Note: If the device is turned off during the system version-upgrade, the contents of
the flash memory are damaged to prevent the machine from correct bootup.
If this is your case, it is necessary to write the system program in the IC card
and resend the upgraded version from the host computer to the device.
(2) LCD display on the device side during online version-upgrade

The following appears on the LCD of the device during the online version upgrade through the
Web browser or FTP protocol.
Remo t e
Cop y
Note: The display shown in the

left figure lasts (for about one
minute) when upgrading the
engine firmware (and the scanner
Remo t e Co p y
S Y S COP Y S T AR T
firmware for MF model).
Remo t e Co p y
S - E RA S I NG X X X
Remo t e Co p y
WR I T I N G X X X
Remo t e Co p y
COP Y F I N I SH ED
Press the Power key for several seconds to
turn it off.
1-23
Chapter 2 Engine Maintenance Mode
Chapter 2
Engine Maintenance Mode
The engine maintenance mode is used in the periodic inspection or troubleshooting.

Chapter 2 describes the engine maintenance mode function and operation.
2-1
2.1
Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation
To troubleshoot the device, it is necessary to enter the engine maintenance mode. The engine
maintenance mode should be operated using the keys on the control panel while checking
screens displayed on the LCD. In the engine maintenance mode, only six keys, [ ], [ ], [ ], [ ],
[ENTER], and [CANCEL], are used. Other keys are not used.
2.1.1
Entering the Engine Maintenance Mode

To enter the engine maintenance mode, use the following procedures:
1 Turn on the device while holding down [ ] and[ ] keys on the operation panel. The screen
appears on the LCD as shown below.
ENG I N E F / W
( 1 . 10 ) 2004 - 08 - 20
Engine firmware version
Engine firmware creation date (year/month/day)
On the second line, engine firmware version and engine firmware creation date (year/
month/day) are displayed.
2 When the following message appears after several seconds,
I NPUT
P A S S WO R D
Press [ ] and [ ] keys in order and then press the [ENTER] key.
Hint:
No matter whether keys are pressed in correct or incorrect order, the buzzer
will sound.
3 After correct keys are pressed, the screen changes as follows.

ENG I N E
MA I N T ENANCE
Hint:
MO D E
When necessary keys are not pressed or keys are pressed in incorrect
order, the ENGINE MAINTENANCE MODE screen will not appear. In this
case, turn off the device once and retry the procedures from Step (1).
4 After several seconds, the "MAINTENANCE CODE 01" screen appears as shown below.
<01>
2-2
ODOME T E R
2.1.2
Engine Maintenance Mode by Control Panel

In the engine maintenance mode, toggle and select the desired numerical value or string, which is
sandwiched by angle brackets on the LCD, with keys on the control panel.
The device supports "select" and "set" modes for the display. When the numerical value is
marked by an underscore, the "set" mode is active.
(1) "Select" and "select and enter"

Selection refers to the operation where the angle-bracketed numerical value or string is changed
to/from another one with the [ ] or [ ] key. "Select and enter" refers to the operation where the
[ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the selection.
(2) "Set" and "set and enter"

Setup refers to the operation where the digit marked by the underscore in the angle brackets is
increased or decreased with the [ ] or [ ] key or the underscore is moved with the [ ] or [ ]
key. "Set and enter" refers to the operation where the [ENTER] key is pressed to confirm the
setting.
mm < 7 0 2 >
(3) Maintenance code and subcode

First, select and enter a maintenance code. Then, select or set a subcode.
1 Select the angle-bracketed maintenance code, mm using [ ] or [ ] keys.
< mm >
"Maintenance code, mm, display."
2 After the [ENTER] key is pressed to select- enter the code, the angle-bracketed subcode, ss,
appears next to it. In this condition, check the contents and perform the maintenance.
mm < s s >
"Maintenance code, mm, subcode, ss, display."
3 After the subcode is select and enter or set and enter, the maintenance code and subcode are
connected with a hyphen (-). In this condition, select the desired parameter and perform the
maintenance.
mm - s s
2-3
2.2
Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu
Table 2-1 shown below lists valid maintenance codes and maintenance and diagnostic menu
selections.
Table 2-1 Valid Maintenance Codes and Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu List
Maintenance
code
01
Function
Refer
item
<01> ODOMETER
Displays the total print distance.
2.3.1
<02> LIFE
Displays the print distance counted until the

replacement of a part, as well as allowable
next print distance.
Clears the print distance counted until the
replacement of a part.
2.3.2
03
<03> CLEANING
Displays the print distance counted until the

cleaning of a part, as well as allowable next
print distance.
Clears the print distance counted until the
cleaning of parts.
2.3.3
04
<04> ERROR LOG
Displays the unrecoverable error

information.
2.3.4
05
<05> JAM LOG
Displays the paper jam error information.
2.3.5
06
<06> SENSOR
Displays the status of sensors and switches.

Controls the buzzer sound so that you can
identify the change in status.
2.3.6
07
<07> THERMISTOR
Displays the status of thermistors and

halogen lamp.
2.3.7
08
<08> ACTUATOR
Displays the status of motors, clutches, and

fans.
Runs these devices independently.
2.3.8
09
<09> TEST
Executes complex operations to adjust the

voltage and current of the high-voltage
power unit, and prints the paper to adjust the
nip pressure.
2.3.9
10
<10> PRINT
Selects any of 18 test patterns supported by

the engine and prints the selected pattern.
2.3.10
11
<11> REGULATE
Executes the adjustment printout required as

a result of change in engine control
parameters such as front edge and side
registrations.
2.3.11
12
<12> PARAMETER
Changes the engine control parameters in

RAM value.
2.3.12
13
<13> NVRAM
Saves the engine control parameters RAM

value to NVRAM.
Initializes NVRAM.
2.3.13
14
<14> USER PARAMETER
Changes the RAM value of user-defined

parameters.
2.3.14
15
<15> ROLL WIDTH
Changes the print width of the paper roll.
2.3.15
16
<16> PROCESS LOG
Displays the process cartridge information.
2.3.16
02
2-4
Display
2.2.1
Operation for Select and Enter Operation the Maintenance Code

Display maintenance code 01 according to the procedures described in Section 2.1.1 "Entering
the Engine Maintenance Mode." Select the maintenance code using [ ] or [ ] key, and press
the [ENTER] key to select and enter the code.
"MAINTENANCE CODE
<01>
<02>
01 DISPLAY"
(To Section 2.3.1)
O D OM E T E R
"MAINTENANCE CODE
02 DISPLAY"
L I FE
(To Section 2.3.2)
"MAINTENANCE CODE
<15>
RO L L
WI DTH
15 DISPLAY"
(To Section 2.3.15)
"MAINTENANCE CODE
<16>
PROCE S S
L OG
16 DISPLAY"
(To Section 2.3.16)
When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, you can return to
the MAINTENANCE CODE 01 screen without using the [ ] or [ ] key.
When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine firmware
version described in Section 2.3.1 1 is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key,
the maintenance code selection window reappears.
When the [ ] key is pressed during the selection of maintenance code, the engine board version
is displayed. After 10 seconds or when you press any key, the maintenance code selection
window reappears.
2-5
2.3
Operation Method of Maintenance and Diagnostic Menus
Maintenance and diagnostic menus classified with maintenance codes are furthermore divided
into detailed subcoded categories. This section describes various operations based on
maintenance codes and subcodes.
2.3.1
Maintenance Code 01 "ODOMETER" (Total Print Distance)
(1) Function
This code displays the total print distance (in meter) and total print count.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
Display
Function
01
01<01> Total
12345 m
Displays the total print distance.
02
01<02> Roll-1
10000 m
Displays the total print distance of roll 1.
03
01<03> Roll-2
20000 m
04
01<04> Roll-3
300 m
05
01<05> Sheet
45 m
Displays the total print distance of manual feed.
06
01<06> Total Count

5678
Displays the total print count.
01
Whenever one drawing is normally plotted, the total print distance and print count are increased.
If an error such as paper jam occurs or the process is terminated during the printout of drawing,
the total distance and count are not increased since the drawing is incomplete.
For about 400-mm long blank space that is fed while "DOOR OPEN CUT" or "TOP EDGE CUT
TIMER" is being enabled, the total print distance is increased but the total print count maintains
the current value.
2-6
In the total print count, the increment is 1 for manual feeding. For the paper roll, the increment is
determined by the length and width of the roll necessary to print one drawing, as shown in the
table below.
Length
Up to (mm)
Count-up value
Up to (lines)
A3 width equivalent paper

roll
594 mm,
610 mm,
620 mm,
700 mm,
707 mm,
22 inch, 24 inch
A1 width equivalent paper

roll
594 mm,
610 mm,
620 mm,
700 mm,
707 mm,
22 inch, 24 inch
460
10867
920
21733
1380
32599
1840
43465
2300
54332
2760
65198
3220
76064
10
3680
86930
12
4140
97797
13
4600
108663
10
15
5060
119529
11
18
5520
130395
13
19
5980
141261
14
21
6440
152128
15
22
6900
162994
16
24
7360
173860
17
25
7820
184726
18
27
8280
195593
19
28
8740
206459
20
30
9200
217325
21
31
9660
228191
22
33
10120
239058
24
36
A3 (297 mm420 mm), 11 inch17 inch, 12 inch18 inch: 1 count-up

A1 (594 mm841 mm), 22 inch34 inch, 24 inch36 inch: 3 count-up
2-7
Length
Up to (mm)
Count-up value
Up to (lines)
A2-size-in-width
equivalent paper roll
420 mm,
440 mm,
450 mm,
500 mm,
17 inch, 18 inch
A0-size-in-width equivalent
paper roll
841 mm,
880 mm,
900 mm,
910 mm,
914 mm,
30 inch,
34 inch, 36 inch
320
7560
640
15119
960
22678
1280
30237
1600
37796
1920
45355
2240
52914
2560
60473
10
2880
68033
11
3200
75592
10
13
3520
83151
11
14
3840
90710
12
15
4160
98269
14
17
4480
105828
15
19
4800
113387
16
20
5120
120946
17
21
5440
128505
18
23
5760
136065
19
24
6080
143624
20
25
6400
151183
21
26
6720
158742
22
27
7040
166301
23
29
7360
173860
24
30
7680
181419
25
31
8000
188978
26
33
8320
196537
28
34
8640
204097
29
35
8960
211656
30
37
9280
219215
31
39
9600
226774
32
40
9920
234333
33
41
10240
241892
34
43
A2 (420 mm594 mm), 17 inch22 inch), 18 inch24 inch: 2 count-up

A0 (841 mm1189 mm), 34 inch44 inch), 36 inch48 inch: 5 count-up
2-8
(2) Operation for displaying the total print distance

1 If maintenance code 01 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select and
Enter the Maintenance Code," the total print distance of the maintenance code 01, subcode
01 is displayed initially.
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display each content sequentially for checking.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 01" display comes back.
<01>
"MAINTENANCE CODE 01 DISPLAY"
O D OM E T E R
01<01>
To t a l
12345 m
01<02>
Ro l l - 1
10000 m
01<03>
Ro l l - 2
2000 m
01<04>
Ro l l - 3
300 m
01< 0 5 >
Shee t
45 m
01<06>
To t a l
12345
Cou n t
2-9
2.3.2
Maintenance Code 02 "LIFE" (part replacement information)
(1) Function
As the part replacement information, the print distance after part replacement and the
replacement criteria are displayed.
Also, the print distance after part replacement can be cleared to "0" by selecting and entering a
subcode. However, for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0."
Note: The print distance must be cleared when a part was replaced.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
02
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
Display
Replace
criteria
02<01>
TH01, 02, 04
12345 m/ 100km
Thermistor
100 km
02<02>
TC Wire
12345 m/ 20km
Charge wire (2)
20 km
02<03>
DC Wire
12345 m/ 20km
Charge wire (3)
20 km
02<04>
Ozone Filter
12345 m/ 50km
Ozone filter
50 km
02<05>
Heat Roll
12345 m/ 100km
Finger (Fuser) Assy
100 km
02<06>
Pressure Roll
12345 m/ 100km
Roller (Heat)
100 km
02<07>
Mag. Blade
12345 m/ 100km
Roller (Backup)
100 km
02<08>
12345 m/ 100km
Blade (DV) Assy
100 km
02<09>
12345 m/
0km
Spare
No criteria
12345 m/
0km
Spare
No criteria
12345 m/
0km
Spare
No criteria
12345 m/
0km
Spare
No criteria
12345 m/
0km
Spare
No criteria
12345 m/
0km
Spare
No criteria
12345 m/
0km
Spare
No criteria
02<10>
02<11>
02<12>
02<13>
02<14>
02<15>
02<01>
TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
1 2 3 4 5 m/ 1 0 0 Km
Print distance after part replacement
2-10
Replacement part name
Part name
Part replacement criterion
(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information

Enter the Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of maintenance code 02,
subcode 01 is displayed initially.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, "maintenance code 02" display comes back.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as
shown on the next page.
<02>
LI FE
02<01>
TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
1 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 Km
02<02>
TC W i r e
12345 m/
02<14>
12345
m/
(To next page)
20 Km
0 Km
key is inactive
for spare parts)
02<15>
12345
m/
0 Km
key is inactive
for spare parts)
2-11
(3) Operation for clearing part replacement information

The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part
was replaced, taking an example of subcode 01.
1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is
displayed if the replaced part is selected and entered.
2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part
replacement is cleared to "0."
3 The "maintenance code 02, subcode 01" display comes back, and the print distance "0" after
part replacement is displayed.
4 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 02,
subcode 01" display comes back without clearing the print distance.
02<01>
TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
1 2 3 4 5 m / 1 0 0 Km
"MAINTENANCE CODE 02, SUBCODE

01 DISPLAY"
(Return to previous page)

(Continued from previous page)
0 2 < 0 1 > TH 0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
C l e a r OK ?
)
02<01>
TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
0 m / 1 0 0 Km
Print distance after replacement becomes "0."
2-12
2.3.3
Maintenance Code 03 "CLEANING" (part cleaning information)
(1) Function
As the part cleaning information, the print distance after part cleaning and the cleaning criteria
are displayed.
Also, the print distance after part cleaning can be cleared to "0" by selecting a subcode. However,
for spare parts, the print distance cannot be cleared to "0."
Note:
Maintenance
code
Subcode
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
03
The print distance must be cleared when a part was cleaned.
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
Location or part name to be

cleaned
Display
Cleaning
criteria
03<01>
TH01, 02, 04
12345 m/ 5 km
Thermistor
5 km
03<02>
TC Wire
12345 m/ 5 km
Change wire (2)
5 km
03<03>
DC Wire
12345 m/ 5 km
Change wire (3)
5 km
03<04>
SLA
12345 m/ 5 km
SLA
5 km
03<05>
Tracking Roll
12345 m/ 5 km
Roller (1)
5 km
03<06>
Heat Roll
12345 m/ 5 km
Roller (Heat)
5 km
03<07>
Pressure Roll
12345 m/ 5 km
Roller (Backup)
5 km
03<08>
Regist Roll
12345 m/ 10 km
Roller (Height)
10 km
03<09>
Cutter Roll
12345 m/ 10 km
Roller (Cutway)
10 km
03<10>
PF. Roll
12345 m/ 10 km
Roller (Paper feed 1, 2)
10 km
03<11>
Spacer DV
12345 m/ 5 km
Spacer (CV)
5 km
03<12>
Fuser Finger
12345 m/ 10 km
Finger (Fuser) ASSY
10 km
03<13>
12345 m/ 0 km
Spare
No criterion
03<14>
12345 m/ 0 km
Spare
No criterion
03<15>
12345 m/ 0 km
Spare
No criterion
03<16>
12345 m/ 0 km
Spare
No criterion
03<17>
12345 m/ 0 km
Spare
No criterion
03<18>
12345 m/ 0 km
Spare
No criterion
03<19>
12345 m/ 0 km
Spare
No criterion
03<02>
TC W i r e
1 2 3 4 5m /
Part name
5 Km
Print distance after part cleaning Part cleaning criterion
2-13
(2) Operation for displaying part replacement information

Enter a Maintenance Code," the part replacement information of the maintenance code 03,
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 03" display comes back.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the print distance after the part replacement can be cleared as
shown on the next page.
<03>
C L E AN I NG
03<01>
TH0 1 , 0 2 , 0 4
12345 m/
5 Km
03<02>
TC W i r e
12345 m/
5 Km
12345
0 Km
03<18>
(To next page)
m/
key is inactive
for spare parts)
03<19>
12345
m/
key is inactive
0 Km
for spare parts)
2-14
(3) Operation for clearing part cleaning information

The following describes the operation for clearing the print distance to be operated after a part
was cleaned, taking an example of subcode 02.
1 Following the message shown on the previous page, a clear confirmation message is
displayed if the cleaned part is selected and entered.
2 If the [ENTER] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the print distance after part
cleaning is cleared to "0." The "maintenance code 03, subcode 02" display comes back, and
the print distance "0" after part cleaning is displayed.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed for the confirmation message, the "maintenance code 03,
subcode 02" display comes back without clearing the print distance.
03<02>
TC Wi r e
12345 m/
"MAINTENANCE CODE 03 SUB CODE 02

DISPLAY"
5 Km

(Continue of previous page)
03 - 02
TC Wi r e
C l e a r OK ?
03<02>
TC Wi r e
0 m/
5 Km
Print distance after part cleaning becomes "0."
2-15
2.3.4
Maintenance Code 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)
(1) Function
This code displays up to ten latest unrecoverable errors.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
01
Display
04<01> [2032]
03-06 (09:30)
Function
R1N A2
12340 m
Displays the information on the latest unrecoverable

error.
Displays the information on the second latest
unrecoverable error.
02
01
:
10
:
04<10> [
:
Displays the information on the tenth latest
unrecoverable error. (If there is no error log, the
error code is left blank.)
An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and
total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows:
Error code
04<01> [ 2032 ]
03 - 06 (09 : 30 )
R1N A2
1 2 3 4 0m
Date of error occurrence

Month/day/hour/minute
(March 6, 9H30M)
2-16
Information on paper used when error

occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width
equivalent to A2)
Total print distance
when error
occurred
Meaning of six-character "paper information"
1st and 2nd characters

(Paper supply source)
Meaning
R1
Roll 1
R2
Roll 2
SH
Manual feed
Paper supply source is not identified.
3rd and 4th characters

(Type of paper)
Meaning
Normal pape
T1
Tracing paper (tracing paper mode 1)
T2
Tracing paper (tracing paper mode 2)
Film
Paper type is not identified.
5th and 6th characters

(paper width)
Meaning
A0
A0 width equivalent roll paper (841 mm)

Roll paper having the following width:
36 inch, 34 inch, 30 inch, 914 mm,
910 mm, 900 mm, and 880 mm
A1

24 inch, 22 inch, 707 mm, 770 mm,
620 mm, and 610 mm
A2

18 inch, 17 inch, 500 mm, 450 mm, and
440 mm
A3

12 inch, 11 inch, 310 mm
Paper supply source is not identified.
2-17
(2) Operation for displaying unrecoverable error log

Enter a Maintenance Code," the unrecoverable error log of the maintenance code 04,
3 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the "maintenance code 04" display comes back.
<04>
2-18
ERROR
L OG
04<01> [2032 ]
03 - 06 (09 : 30 )
R1N A2
1 2 3 4 0m
04<02> [ 2032 ]
03 - 05 (18 : 32 )
R1N A3
1 2 3 0 0m
04<09> [
04<10> [
(3) Unrecoverable error codes and description
Table 2-2 Lists of Unrecoverable Error Codes

Unrecoverable
error codes
2020
2021, 2022
2023
2024, 202A
Description
BM01 (waster toner bottle vibrating motor) trouble
HM01 (heat roller pulse motor) trouble
PM01 (process motor) trouble
CM01 (developer pulse motor) trouble
2026, 202B
TM01 (paper feed pulse motor) trouble
2027, 202C
FM01 (paper feed pulse motor 1) trouble
2028, 202D
2029, 202E
2030
Power supply failure (50Hz/60Hz evaluation value is abnormal)
2032
High voltage power supply failure (overload occurred in high voltage output)
2033
Power supply failure (interrupt does not occur when the power turns off)
2035
LED head correction data transfer error (time out)
2036
LED head correction data transfer error (header error)
2037
LED head correction data transfer error (footer error)
2081
TH02 (over thermistor) detected overheat of fuser temperature
2082
TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure

Extremely high temperature (cables could be shorted)
2083
TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) exceeded the fixation upper limit temp
2084
After warm-up started, fixation temperature TH01 did not reach specified temp within specified time
2085
TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted) or
extremely low temp (cables could be disconnected)
2086
TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) exceeded the LED head upper limit temp
2087
TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted)
2088
2089
20C1-20C3
NVRAM checksum error (system parameter)
20C4
NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part replacement)
20C5
NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part cleaning)
20C6
NVRAM checksum error (user-defined engine parameter)
20C8
NVRAM checksum error (unrecoverable error log)
20C9
NVRAM checksum error (paper jam error log)
20CA
NVRAM checksum error (process cartridge consumption log)
20D1-20D8
NVRAM checksum error (engine control parameter)
20E0
WDT (watchdog timer) overflow
2D01
NAK was transmitted to the controller 7 times but no command is returned
2D02
Response to the controller was made 7 times but ACK is not returned
2D03
In receiving data from controller, the line error was detected more than 100 times
2D04
Engine status transition was noticed to the controller 7 times but ACK is not returned
2F7C
After F/W rewriting error occurred, the flash memory cannot be cleared (F/W cannot be restored)
2F7D
After F/W rewriting error occurred, no data can be written to the flash memory (F/W cannot be restored)
2F7E
After F/W rewriting error occurred, checksum of F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match (F/W cannot
be restored)
2F7F
After F/W rewriting error occurred, F/W rewritten to the flash memory does not match the contents of SRAM (F/W
cannot be restored)
2-19
2.3.5
Maintenance Code 05 "JAM LOG" (Paper Jam Error Log)
(1) Function
This code displays up to ten latest paper jam errors.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
Display
Feature
01
05<01> [3702]
03-07 (10:58)
R1N A3
12345 m
Displays the information on the latest paper jam error.
02
05<01> [3702]
03-05 (18:25)
R1N A3
12300 m
Displays the information on the second latest paper jam

error.
05
:
10
:
05<10> [
:
Displays the information on the tenth latest paper jam
error. (If there is no error log, the error code is left
blank.)
An error code, information on paper used when an error occurred, date of error occurrence, and
total print distance when an error occurred are displayed as follows:
Error code
05<01> [3702 ]
03 - 07 (10 : 58 )
Date of error occurrence
Month day hour minute
(March 7, 10H58M)
R1N A3
1 2 3 4 5m
Total print distance when error
Information on paper used when error

occurred (Roll 1, normal paper, width
equivalent to A3)
occurred
The meaning of the six-character "paper information" is the same as that explained in Section
2.3.4 "MAINTENANCE CODE 04 "ERROR LOG" (Unrecoverable Error Log)."
2-20
(2) Operation for displaying paper jam error log

Enter a Maintenance Code," the latest paper jam error information of the maintenance
code 05, subcode 01 is displayed initially.
<05>
J AM
L OG
05<01> [ 3702 ]
03 - 07 ( 10 : 58 )
R1N A3
1 2 3 4 5m
05<02> [ 3701 ]
03 - 05 (18 : 25 )
R1N A3
1 2 3 0 0m
05<09> [3601 ]
0 2 -1 8 ( 1 5 : 0 3 )
R2T1A1
1 2 0 0 0m
05<10> [
2-21
(3) Paper jam error codes and description

Table 2-3 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes
Doors to open for removing the paper
Paper jam
error codes
Description
3330
Paper is located at PS30 (under cutter) position
3331
3332
Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3

paper feed
Door 5 and then Door 1
3400
3401, 3402
Arrival of paper top edge at PS04 is too early
3403, 3404
Paper top edge does not arrive at PS04
3491, 3492
When paper roll is rewound, arrival at PS04 is too

early
3493, 3494
When paper roll is rewound, paper exists in PS04

after preset paper pass time elapsed
3500
3501, 3502

3591, 3592
Paper trail edge leaves PS05 too early
3593, 3594
Paper trail edge does not leave PS05 after preset

paper pass time elapsed
3600
3601, 3602
3603, 3604
Paper is located in PS04 (suction) position
3693, 3694
3703, 3704
Door 5
Paper is located in PS07 (fuser) position
Door 6
Door6
Door 6 (Door 5 and) Door 9,
Door 4
Door 6
Door6
Door 4
Door 6
Door 6
Door6
Door 4
Door 6
Door6
Door 4

3791, 3792
3793, 3794

3042-3047
Trouble when cutter blade moves
Door1:
Door2:
Door4:
Door5:
Door6:
Door7:
Door8:
Door9:
Door10:
Roll 1 (top) drawer

Roll 2 (middle) drawer
Manual feed drawer
Cutter door
Top cover
Fixation door
Manual paper feeding holder
Cutter door inside
Cutter door lower small door
Door 6
Door 5
PS21
PS22
CNCT
INT3
MS08, INT1
MS06
MS07
(No open-close detection senor)
(No open-close detection senor)
Door 1 means either Door 1 or Door 2.

To open the Door 7, the Door 8 must be opened first.
To open the Door 9, the Door 5 must be opened first.
2-22
(Door 5 and) Door 9, Door 4
Door 6

3701, 3702
Door 6
Arrival of paper top edge at PS06 is too earl
3691, 3692
3700
Door 1
Paper is located in PS04 (register) position
3503, 3504
Manual paper feed
2.3.6
Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor)
(1) Function
This code displays the status of sensors and switches.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
11
12
06
13
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Display
06<00> Beep
OFF
06<01> PS30
OFF
06<02> PS31
OFF
06<03> PS32
OFF
06<04> PS04
OFF
06<05> PS05
OFF
06<06> PS06
OFF
06<07> PS07
OFF
06<08> PS11
ON
06<09> PS12
ON
06<11> PS15
OFF
06<12> PS21
ON
06<13> PS22
ON
06<15> MS04
ON
06<16> MS05
ON
06<17> MS06
ON
06<18> MS07
ON
06<19> MS08
ON
06<20> INT1
ON
06<21> INT3
ON
06<22> CNCT
ON
06<23> RE01
OFF
06<24> RE02
ON
06<25> TS01
ON
06<26> TS02
OFF
Function
Status
Enables or disables the buzzer used to

identify the status of relevant devices.
Displays the status of the paper width
judge sensor. (A0 width or more)
Displays the status of the paper
detection sensor (cutter lower).
detection sensor (registration).
detection sensor (suction).
detection sensor (fixation).
Displays the status of the roll 1 flange
detection sensor.
Displays the status of the roll 2 flange
detection sensor.
Displays the status of the manual feed
paper detection sensor.
Displays the status of the roll 1 drawer
open/close detection sensor. (Door 1)
Displays the status of the roll 2 drawer
open/close detection sensor. (Door 2)
Displays the status of the toner door
open/close switch.
Displays the status of the waste toner
bottle detection switch.
Displays the status of the fixation door
open/close switch. (Door 7)
holder open/close switch.
Displays the status of the upper door
(left side) open/close switch. (Door 6)
Displays the status of the upper door
open/close interlock switch. (Door 6)
Displays the status of the cutter door
open/close interlock switch. (Door 5)
drawer open/close connector. (Door
4)
Displays the status of the cutter blade
detection (right edge) micro switch.
Displays the status of the cutter blade
detection (left edge) micro switch.
ON: Buzzer works.

OFF: Buzzer does not work.
ON: Paper exists.

OFF: Paper does not exist.
ON: Roll flanges exist.

OFF: Roll flange does not
exist.
ON: Paper exists.
OFF: Paper does not exist.
ON: Close
OFF: Open
ON: Bottle exists.

OFF: Bottle does not exist.
ON: Close
OFF: Open
ON: Cutter blade exists.

OFF: Cutter blade does not
exist.
Displays the status of the toner sensor.
ON: Toner exists.

Displays the status of the waste toner OFF: Toner does not exist.
sensor
2-23
(2) Operation for displaying the sensor status

Enter the Maintenance Code," the buzzer set of the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 is
displayed initially.
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each sensor.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed during the setup of buzzer (subcode 00), you can enable or
disable the buzzer whose tone is changed according to the status of sensors and switches, as
described on the next page.
<06>
S E NSOR
06<00>
Beep
06<01>
PS3 0
OFF
ON
06<25>
TS01
ON
06<26>
TS0 2
OF F
2-24
To next page
(3) Operation for buzzer enable/disable setting

On the maintenance code 06, subcode 00 screen, you can enable or disable the buzzer whose tone
is changed according to the status of sensors and switches.
1 When subcode 00 is selected and entered, the parameter that shows the setting opposite to the
current valid setting is displayed.
2 Press [ENTER] key. The buzzer setting will change from ON to OFF and vice versa.
3 Press [CANCEL] key. The current setting is maintained.
"MAINE. CODE 06 SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"
06<00>
Beep
OFF

06 - 00
Beep
OF F
< ON >
06<00>
Beep
ON
Setting changes from OFF to ON.
Hint:
After ON is selected, the buzzer sounds in different tone depending on the

status of the sensors or switches selected from SUBCODE 01 through 26.
When the sensor is turned on, the long beep sound is generated. When the
sensor is turned off, the short beep sound is generated.
When the maintenance code 06 SENSOR display is closed, this 06
mode is quitted.
2-25
2.3.7
Maintenance Code 07 "THERMISTOR" (Thermistor)
(1) Function
This code displays the status of thermistors and halogen lamp.
Hint:
In Subcode 01, 03, and 04, an asterisk (*) shows the status of two halogen
lamps of the fixation device.
While the halogen lamp to heat the central area is being turned on, the
status is indicated with the 10th character. While the halogen lamp to heat
both side areas is being turned on, the status is indicated with the 6th
character.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
Display
Status
01
07<01> TH01
* 123 C
TH01: Displays the

temperature at the center of
the fixation.
02
07<02> TH02
NORMAL
OVERHEAT:
TH02: Displays whether the
Overheat is detected.
overheated fixation is
NORMAL:
detected.
Overheat is not detected.
03
07<03> TH02
*
* 32 C
TH03: Displays the

temperature of the LED head.
04
07<04> TH04
*
100 C
TH04: Displays the

temperature at the left end of
the fixation.
07
Hint:
2-26
Function
The lower display limit of temperatures of TH1 and TH4 is 45C. If there is
any disconnection, 45C or 51C is displayed.
(2) Operation for checking thermistor status

Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 07, subcode 01 is displayed initially.
2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display the status of each thermistor for checking.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the [maintenance code 07] display comes back.
<07>
T H E RM I S T OR
07<01>
07<02>
TH0 1
*
123 C
TH0 2
NORMA L
07<03>
*
TH0 3
*
07<04>
*
TH0 4
32 C
10 0 C
2-27
2.3.8
Maintenance Code 08 "ACTUATOR" (Actuator)
(1) Function
This code displays the status of the system equipment such as high-voltage power unit, motor,
and clutch, and specifies their operations.
Hint:
Maintenance
code
Subcode
00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
08
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
2-28
When maintenance code 08 is active, errors such as a door open error are
not detected.
Display
Function
Turns off major actuators.
08<00> Actuator
08<01> CC
Status or operation
parameter
OFF: OFF
OFF
Displays the status of the charge unit

(CC) and specifies its operation.
OFF
Displays the status of the developer

unit (DB) and specifies its operation.
OFF
Displays the status of the transcription ON: ON

unit (TC) and specifies its operation. OFF: OFF
OFF
Displays the status of the separator

(DC) and specifies its operation.
OFF
Displays the status of the dischange

(EL) and specifies its operation.
OFF
Displays the status of the process ON: Rotated

motor and specifies its operation.
OFF: Stopped
OFF
Displays the status of the heat roller ON: Rotated

pulse motor and specifies its operation. OFF: Stopped
08<02> DB
08<03> TC
08<04> DC
08<05> EL
08<06> PM01
08<07> HM01
08<08> GM01
OFF
08<09> BM01
OFF
08<10> TM01
OFF
08<11> FM01
OFF
08<12> FM02
OFF
08<13> FM03
OFF
ON1: Developing direction

Displays the status of the developer
CW-ON
unit pulse motor and specifies its ON2: Toner stirring direction
operation.
CW-ON
OFF: Stopped
Displays the status of the waste toner
ON: Rotated
bottle vibration monitor and specifies
OFF: Stopped
its operation.
ON1: Paper feed direction
CCW-ON
Displays the status of the paper feed
ON2: Rewinding direction
pulse motor and specifies its operation.
CW-ON
OFF: Stop
Displays the status of the paper feed 1
ON1: Paper feed direction
and specifies its operation.
CW-ON
Displays the status of the paper feed 2
ON2: Rewinding direction
CCW-ON
Displays the status of the paper feed 3 OFF: Stop
OFF
Displays the status of the registration

roller clutch and specifies its
operation.
ON: Engaged
Displays the status of the paper feed OFF: Disengaged
OFF
roller clutch and specifies its

operation.
08<14> CL04
08<15> CL06
08<16> BL01
OFF
08<17> BL02
OFF
08<18> BL03
OFF
08<19> BL06
OFF
Displays the status of the suction fan

ON1: Rotated fast
Displays the status of the fixation ON2: Rotated slowly
device top center fan and specifies its OFF: Stopped
operation.
Displays the status of the charge unit ON: Rotated
fan and specifies its operation.
OFF: Stopped
Displays the status of the fixation top ON1: Rotated fast
b o t h e d g e f a n a n d s p e c i f i e s i t s ON2: Rotated slowly
OFF: Stopped
operation.
(2) Operation for checking the actuator status

2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key to display current status of each actuator for checking.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation of the actuators can be
specified as shown in (3) or (4) on the following pages.
<08>
AC T UA TOR
08<00>
Ac t ua t o r
08<01>
CC
OFF
08<18>
BL03
OFF
08<19>
BL06
o f f
(To next page )
(To page 2-31)
(To page 2-31)
(To page 2-31)
OFF
2-29
(3) Operation for turning off the actuators

With the maintenance code 08, subcode 00, main actuators can be turned off.
1 If subcode 00 is selected and entered, parameter <OFF> is displayed.
2 Press the [ENTER] key to execute the actuator OFF.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the actuator OFF is not executed.
08<00>
Ac t ua t o r
o f f
"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 00 DISPLAY"

08 - 00
Ac t ua t o r o f f
<OFF >
Actuator OFF is
executed
08<00>
Ac t ua t o r
o f f
The actuators changed by the actuator off operation and the statuses immediately after actuator
off operation are as listed below:
Actuator
2-30
CC
Charger
DB
Developer
TC
Transcription
DC
Separator
EL
Delectrification
PM01
Process motor
HM01
Heat roller pulse motor
GM01
Developer unit pulse motor
BM01
Waste toner bottle vibration motor
TM01
Paper feed pulse motor
FM01
Paper feed pulse motor 1
FM02
FM03
CUTM
Cutter motor
CL04
Registration roller clutch
CL06
Manual feed roller clutch
BL01
Suction fan
Status immediately after

"OFF" entry
OFF: OFF
OFF: Stopped
OFF: Stopped
OFF: Disengaged
OFF: Stopped
BL02
Fixation top center fan
ON: Rotated
BL03
Charging unit fan
OFF: Stopped
BL06
Fixation top both edge fan
ON: Rotated
FL01
Fixation halogen lamp (center part)
FL02
Fixation halogen lamp (both edge part)
OFF: Turned off
(4) Operation for executing actuator operation

The following describes the operation for executing the actuator operation, taking an example of
subcode 01.
1 If the actuator to be operated is selected and entered, the "ON/OFF" parameter is
parenthesized.
2 If the "ON/OFF" parameter is selected and entered, the selected operation is executed. The
display returns to "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" and the "ON/OFF" status changes to
the specified one.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during selection of "ON/OFF" parameter, the "ON/OFF" is
not changed and the "maintenance code 08, subcode 01" display comes back.
0 8<01 >
"MAINTENANCE CODE 08, SUBCODE 01DISPLAY"
CC
OF F
(Continued from Page 2-29)

(Return to Page 2-29)
Select and enter "ON/OFF"
08 - 01
parameter
CC
<ON >
08<01>
CC
ON
Setting changes from OFF to ON
Note:
If the motor rotating direction is changed, select "OFF" once, and then
change the direction.
If "OFF" is selected for the pulse motor, it will stop after deceleration, but
during the deceleration, ON1 or ON2 is displayed.
2-31
2.3.9
Maintenance Code 09 "TEST" (Test)
(1) Function
Performs the test functions below:
Maintenance
code
Subcode
Display
01
09<01> CC Check
Performs the operation to adjust the primary

charge current.
02
09<02> DB Check
Performs the operation to adjust the developer

bias.
03
09<03> TC Check
Performs the operation to adjust the transfer

current.
04
09<04> DC Check
Performs the operation to adjust the separator

bias.
05
09<05> LED-H on
Performs the operation to turn on the lamp

in the LED head.
06
09<06> LED-H blink
Performs the operation to blink the lamp in

the LED head.
07
09<07> NIP 5
Performs the prints test pattern 5 (2 by 2

horizontal pattern) to adjust the fixation nip
pressure.
08
09<08> NIP 17
Performs the prints test pattern 17 (solid

black) to adjust the fixation nip pressure.
09
09<09> NIP 20
Performs the prints test pattern 20 (2 by 2

vertical pattern) to adjust the fixation nip
pressure.
09
2-32
Function
Refer item
2.3.9 (3)
2.3.9 (4)
2.3.9 (5)
(2) Operation for selecting the test item

2 Select a subcode using [ ] or [ ] key.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the selected item, the operation as shown in (3), (4), or
(5) on the following pages can be executed.
<09>
TEST
09<01>
CC
Ch e c k
(To next page)
09<02>
DB
Ch e c k
(To next page)
09<08>
N I P
17
(To page 2-36)
09<09>
N I P
20
(To page 2-36)
2-33
(3) Operation for executing operation to adjust the current voltage

This following describes the operation to adjust the current voltage operation taking an example
of subcode 01.
1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter the item. The device enters the test mode to adjust
the selected item. During the test, the machine displays the message showing the execution of
adjustment.
2 After the adjustment, press the [CANCEL] key. The operation stops and the maintenance
code 09, subcode01 display comes back.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is not pressed for 3 minutes after the adjustment, the maintenance
code 09, subcode 01display comes back.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUBCODE
09<01>
CC
01 DISPLAY"
Che c k

09 - 01
(
CC C h e c k
Execu t i on
When the
Under testing
key is not pressed for 3
minutes, the test run stops.
09 - 01
(
CC Ch e c k
S t op
Several seconds later
09 - 01
(
2-34
CC C h e c k
End
(4) Operation for executing turning on or blinking in the LED head

Subcodes 05 and 06 allow you to respectively turn on and blink the LED head.
The procedures with subcode 06 are shown below:
1 Press the [ENTER] key to select and enter, the LED head starts blinking and the message
informing the current status appears on the screen.
2 When 10 seconds passed or the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the LED head stops blinking and
the maintenance code 09, subcode 07 display comes back.
06 DISPLAY"
09<06>
L ED - H
b l i nk
(Return to page 2-33)

(Continued from page 2-33)
09 - 06
L ED - H b l i n k
(
Execu t i on
)
When the
LED head is
blinking.
key is not pressed for 10
seconds, the LED head stops blinking.
09 - 06
(
L ED - H
S t op
09 - 06
(
Note:
b l i nk
)
L ED - H
End
bl i nk
)
Whether the LED head is lighting or blinking may not be identified

depending on the surrounding environment.
2-35
(5) Operation for executing the nip pressure adjustment print

Subcodes 07,08, and 09 allow you to print test patterns necessary to adjust the nip pressure of the
fixation. Subcode 07 outputs test pattern 5 (2 by 2 horizontal pattern) while Subcode 08 is
outputting test pattern 17(solid black). The procedures in case of SUBCODE 07 are shown
below:
1 Select the "Paper" parameter.
2 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed during the selection of paper, the maintenance 09,
subcode 10 display come back.
3 Select the paper and press the [ENTER] key, and printout starts.
4 After part of the paper comes out from the fixation, the machine stops unfeeding for about 10
seconds and then the paper is output completely.
5 When the printout is normally finished, the message informing the completion of process
appears and the maintenance 09, subcode 07 display comes back.
6 If an error occurs during the process, the error message appears.
09<07>
N I P
"MAINTENANCE CODE 09 SUB CODE 07

DISPLAY"
09 - 07
<SH>
N I P
09 - 07
<R1>
NI P
Test pattern 7 is being

printed
09 - 07
N I P
5
Pr i n t i ng
09 - 07
N I P
5
P r i n t End
Select and confirm the "Paper" parameter from the table shown below.
Display
2-36
Description
<SH>
Manual feed
<R1>
Roll 1
<R2>
Roll 2
<R3>
Roll 3
Normal
termination
2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print)

(1) Function
This code prints engine test patterns.
This code allows you to select and enter the test pattern connected to the subcode, determine the
parameters such as print length, and execute printout.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
01
Display
10<01> Print 1
Function (test pattern to be printed)

Pattern 1: Thick vertical stripes
02
10<02> Print 2
Pattern 2: Checker
03
10<03> Print 3
Pattern 3: Thick horizontal stripes
04
10<04> Print 4
Pattern 4: 1 by 3 horizontal
05
10<05> Print 5
Pattern 5: 2 by 2 horizontal
06
10<06> Print 6
Pattern 6: 2 by 14 vertical
07
10<07> Print 7
Pattern 7: 1- dot line, 64- dot square mesh
08
10<08> Print 8
Pattern 8: 1-dot mesh
09
10<09> Print 9
10
10<10> Print 10
11
10<11> Print 11
Pattern 11: 2 by 2 horizontal, 2-dot shift
10
12
10<12> Print 12
Pattern 12: (square mesh + black + white)
13
10<13> Print 13
Pattern 13: (square mesh + scale)
14
10<14> Print 14
Pattern 14: (square mesh + 1-dot slant line)
15
10<15> Print 15
Pattern 15: (square mesh + 2-dot slant line)
16
10<16> Print 16
Pattern 16: (square mesh + 1-dot slant line + 2-dot slant line)
17
10<17> Print 17
Pattern 17: Solid black
18
10<18> Print 18
Pattern 18: Solid white
19
10<19> Print 19
20
10<20> Print 20
2-37
(2) Operation for selecting the test pattern

1 If the maintenance code 10 is selected and entered by "Section 2.2.1 Operation for Select
and Enter the Maintenance Code," the maintenance code 10, subcode 01 is displayed
initially.
2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or test pattern.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed, the desired test pattern is selected and entered, the test pattern
can be printed as described on the next page.
<10>
2-38
PR I NT
"MAINTENANCE CODE 10 DIAPLAY"
10<01>
Pr i n t
(To next page)
10<02>
Pr i n t
(To next page)
10<19>
Pr i n t
19
(To next page)
10<20>
Pr i n t
20
(To next page)
(3) Operation for executing the print

The following describes the operation for selecting a test pattern and then executing the print,
taking an example of subcode 14.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Select the "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.

Select the "Print Length" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
Set the "Print Count" parameter.
If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter selection, the "maintenance code 10,
subcode 14" display comes back.
Press the [ENTER] key to enter the parameters, and the print will start.
If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during printing of multiple sheets, the print terminates and
the initial screen comes back.
When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial
screen comes back.
If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 10, SUBCODE 14 DISPLAY"
10<14>
P r i n t
14
10 - 14
<R1N>
(Continued from previous

page)
P r i n t 14
2 1 0 mm
10 - 14
R2N
<
Pr i n t 14
1 6 8 2 mm >
10 - 14
R2N
P r i n t 14
1 6 8 2 mm
<
2>
During printing
Select "Print Length"

parameter
Set "Print Count"
10 - 14
(
Select "Paper" parameter
parameter
P r i n t 14
P r i n t i ng
(Terminated
in midway)
10 - 14
Pr i n t 14
(
P r i n t End
Normal
termination of print
2-39
Select the "Paper" parameter from the table below.

Display
Description
<SH >
Manual feed
<R1N>
Roll 1, normal paper
<R1T>
Roll 1, tracing paper
<R1F>
Roll 1, film
<R2N>
<R2T>
<R2F>
Roll 2, film
<R3N>
<R3T>
<R3F>
Roll 3, film
Select the "Print Length" parameter from the table below.

Display
2-40
Description
< 210 mm>
210 mm
(4961 lines)
< 297 mm>
297 mm
(7016 lines)
< 420 mm>
420 mm
(9921 lines)
< 594 mm>
594 mm
(14032 lines)
< 841 mm>
841 mm
(19866 lines)
< 1189 mm>
1189 mm
(28087 lines)
< 1682 mm>
1682 mm = 841 2
(39733 lines)
< 2378 mm>
2378 mm = 1189 2
(56174 lines)
< 2523 mm>
2523 mm = 841 3
(59599 lines)
< 3000 mm>
3000 mm
(70867 lines)
< 4000 mm>
4000 mm
(94489 lines)
< 5000 mm>
5000 mm
(118111 lines)
< 6000 mm>
6000 mm
(141733 lines)
< 7000 mm>
7000 mm
(165356 lines)
< 8000 mm>
8000 mm
(188978 lines)
< 9000 mm>
9000 mm
(212600 lines)
<10000 mm>
10000 mm
(236222 lines)
< 8.5">
8.5 inch = 215.9 mm
(5100 lines)
< 9" >
9 inch = 228.6 mm
(5400 lines)
< 11" >
11 inch = 279.4 mm
(6600 lines)
< 12" >
12 inch = 304.8 mm
(7200 lines)
< 17" >
17 inch = 431.8 mm
(10200 lines)
< 18" >
18 inch = 457.2 mm
(10800 lines)
< 22" >
22 inch = 558.8 mm
(13200 lines)
< 24" >
24 inch = 609.6 mm
(14400 lines)
< 30" >
30 inch = 762.0 mm
(18000 lines)
< 34" >
34 inch = 863.6 mm
(20400 lines)
< 36" >
36 inch = 914.4 mm
(21600 lines)
< 42" >
42 inch = 1066.8 mm
(25200 lines)
< 44" >
44 inch = 1117.6 mm
(26400 lines)
< 48" >
48 inch = 1219.2 mm
(28800 lines)
Enter the "Print Sheets" parameter from the table below.

Display
Description
< 1>
Prints one test pattern.
< 2>
Prints two test patterns continuously.
:
<99>
:
Prints 99 test patterns continuously.
2-41
2.3.11 Maintenance Code 11 "REGULATE" (Adjustment)

(1) Function
Performs the following adjustments.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
Display
Function
Refer to
01
11<01> Front Regist
Executes printing for adjustment

of top edge registration.
2.3.11(3)
02
11<02> CenterRegist

of center registration.
2.3.11(4)
03
11<03> Print Length

of print length.
2.3.11(5)
04
11<04> Cut Length

of cut length.
2.3.11(3)
11
After the "Paper" parameter is selected and entered in each adjustment, NVRAM and RAM
values of the engine control parameter are displayed as shown below:
11 - 01
<A - N1>
F r on t Reg i s t
220 :
220
"Adjustment" parameter
PAPER parameter
Engine control
parameter of
Engine control parameter

of NVRAM value
NVRAM value
For the number and description of the engine control parameter to be changed, see Section
2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Engine Control Parameter). For Save
method of parameter, see Section 2.3.12 (3) "Changing the parameter value in RAM." For
Save method of adjusted parameter, see Section "2.2.13 (3) Operation for saving the
parameter."
2-42
(2) Operation for selecting adjustment item

Enter the Maintenance Code," the adjustment function of the maintenance code 11,
2 Select a subcode (adjustment function) using [ ] or [ ] key.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed to enter the select adjustment item, the print for adjustment can
be executed as shown on the following page.
<11>
R EGU L A T E
11<01>
F r on t
11<02>
Cen t e r
11<03>
Pr i n t
11<04>
Cu t
Reg i s t
Reg i s t
Leng t h
Leng t h
(To next page)
(To page 2-47)
(To page 2-49)
(To next page)
2-43
(3) Operation for executing the print to adjust top register or cut length
The operating method of subcode 01 (top register adjustment) and subcode 04 (cut length
adjustment) is the same.
The following describes the operation for executing the print for adjustment, taking an example
of subcode 01 (top register adjustment).
1 Select "paper (length, type, width)" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
2 Set the "adjustment" parameter.
3 If the [CANCEL] key is pressed during parameter setting, the "maintenance code 11, subcode
01" display comes back.
4 If the [ENTER] key is pressed during parameter setting, three-sheet (one-sheet in the case of
manual feed) print starts.
5 When the print terminated normally, the "Print End" message is displayed and the initial
screen comes back.
6 If an error occurs during printing, the error message is displayed.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 01
11<01> Fr on t
DISPLAYED"
Reg i s t
(Continued of previous
page)
11 - 01
<A - N1>
F r on t Reg i s t
220 :
220
Select and enter the

"Paper (Length, Type,
Width)" parameter
11 - 01
A - N1
F r on t Reg i s t
220 : < 220>
I=
11 - 01
A - N1
F r on t Re g i s t
220 : < 221>
11 - 01
I=
"Adjust" parameter
F r on t Reg i s t
P r i n t i ng
)
11 - 01
F r on t Reg i s t
P r i n t End
)
During printing.
2-44
I=
(Terminated
in midway)
Normal termination of
print.
Select the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter from the table below:
Display
<X-N0>
<X-N1>
<X-N2>
<X-N3>
<X-T0>
<X-T1>
<X-T2>
<X-T3>
<X-F0>
<X-F1>
<X-F2>
<X-F3>
<A-N0>
<A-N1>
<A-N2>
<A-N3>
<A-T0>
<A-T1>
<A-T2>
<A-T3>
<A-F0>
<A-F1>
<A-F2>
<A-F3>
<B-N0>
<B-N1>
<B-N2>
<B-N3>
<B-T0>
<B-T1>
<B-T2>
<B-T3>
<B-F0>
<B-F1>
<B-F2>
<B-F3>
<C-N0>
<C-N1>
<C-N2>
<C-N3>
<C-T0>
<C-T1>
<C-T2>
<C-T3>
<C-F0>
<C-F1>
<C-F2>
<C-F3>
<C-F1>
< SH >
Prints three sheets

Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Prints three sheets
Manual feed
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
of
Description
2523 mm long (print X) A0 width paper roll and normal paper.
2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
2523-mm long (print X) A0-size-in-width roll film.
841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.
841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
841-mm long (print A) A0-size-in-width roll film.
297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.
297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
297-mm long (print B) A0-size-in-width roll film.
210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll normal paper.
210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll tracing paper.
210-mm long (print C) A0-size-in-width roll film.
2-45
For Subcode 04 (adjustment of cut length), the manual loading, <SH>, cannot be selected.
The roll 1 paper feed takes precedence over all others, except for manual feed <SH>. That is:
When the paper is loaded to the roll 1 drawer, this drawer should be used.
When the paper is not loaded to the roll 1 drawer but the paper is loaded to the roll 2 drawer, the
roll 2 drawer should be used.
Note:
Be sure to load the paper whose type and width agree with those selected
with the "Paper (Length, Type, Width)" parameter.
Print the pattern 13 (mesh + scale).

Hint:
2-46
For description of the ADJUST parameter, see Section 2.3.12 Engine

Control Parameter. For "Save method of parameter," "see Section 2.3.13
(3) Operation for saving the parameter."
(4) Operation for executing the print to center register adjustment

The operating method of subcode 02 (center register adjustment).
1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
screen comes back.
11<02>
"MAINTENANCE CODE 11 SUBCODE 02 DISPLAY"
Ce n t e r Reg i s t

11 - 02
<R1>
Cen t e r Reg i s t
50 :
50
11 - 02
R1
Cen t e r Reg i s t
50 : <
50>
11 - 02
R1
printing.
11 - 02
(
"Paper" parameter
Ce n t e r Reg i s t
50 : <
49>
During

"Adjust" parameter
Cen t e r Reg i s t
P r i n t i ng
)
(Terminated
in midway)
11 - 0 2 Ce n t e r Reg i s t
P r i n t End
)
Normal termination
of print.
2-47
Select the PAPER parameter from the list shown below:

Display
Description
< R1 >
Roll 1.
< R2 >
Roll 2.
< R3 >
Roll 3.
< SH >
Manual feed
Print the pattern 13 (mesh + scale) sheet in normal 420 mm long (9921 lines) paper.
Hint:
2-48
For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see Section 2.3.12 Engine

Control Parameter. For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13
(5) Operation for executing the print to plotting length adjustment

The operating method of subcode 03 (plotting length adjustment).
1 Select "Paper" parameter, and press the [ ] key.
screen comes back.
11<03>
P r i n t

DISPLAY"
Leng t h
(Continue of page 2-43)

(Return to page 2-43 )
11 - 03
<Ro - X>
P r i n t Leng t h
1923 : 1923
11 - 03
Ro - X
P r i n t Leng t h
1923 : <1923>
I=
11 - 03
Ro - X
I=
printing.
11 - 03
(
"Paper" parameter
I=
Pr i n t Leng t h
1923 : <1924>
During

"Adjust" parameter
P r i n t Leng t h
P r i n t i ng
)
(Terminated
in midway)
11 - 03
P r i n t Leng t h
P r i n t End
)
Normal termination
of print.
2-49
Select and enter the Paper parameter from the table below:
Display
Description
<RT-C>
210 mm long (print C) roll paper (tracing paper).
<RF-C>
210 mm long (print C) roll paper (tracing paper).
<Ro-X>
2523 mm long (print X) roll paper.
<Ro-A>
841 mm long (print A) roll paper.
<Ro-B>
297 mm long (print B) roll paper.
<Ro-C>
210 mm long (print C) roll paper (plain paper).
< SH >
Manual feed
The roll 1 paper feed takes precedence over all others, except for manual feed <SH>. That is:
When the paper is loaded to the roll 1 drawer, this drawer should be used.
When the paper is not loaded to the roll 1 drawer but the paper is loaded to the roll 2 drawer, the
roll 2 drawer should be used.
The normal paper is used and three sheets of test pattern 13 (mesh + scale) are printed.
Hint:
2-50
For description of the "Adjust" parameter, see "Section 2.3.12 Engine

control parameter." For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13
2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter)

(1) Function
This code changes RAM values of engine control parameters.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
101
102
:
12
Function
12<101> 200
200
12<102>
Changes the RAM value of engine control

parameter 101.
50
50

parameter 102.
863
-
Display
12<863>
:
0
0

parameter 863.
12<864>
(If non operable number is specified, no value is

displayed.)
RAM and NVRAM values of the engine control parameter are displayed on second and first
lines, respectively.
12 - 601
<
430
4 3 0>
Subcode
(engine control parameter number)
RAM value of engine

control parameter 601
NVRAM value of engine

control parameter 601
Immediately after the device is turned on, the engine control parameter is copied from NVRAM
to RAM. Therefore, if the value saved in RAM has not been changed after powering on, the same
value appears on both first and second lines.
Numbers for the operable engine parameters are as follows:
101 to 154, 201 to 263, 301 to 363, 401 to 463, 701 to 763, and 801 to 863
Parameters with any other numbers are not operable.
Note that values for numbers 155 to 163, 501 to 563, are indefinite.
Note:
Even when the specified parameter is operable, it must not be changed

unreasonably provided that it is not listed in the engine control parameter
lists described on next pages.
Hint:
For "Save method of parameter," see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for
saving parameter."
2-51
The print length of the paper roll determines the print category as table below. (The length of the
boundary may be changed.)
Print category
Print length
Typical length
Print X
28801 lines (approx. 1219 mm, approx. 48.002 inches)

or more
1682, 2378, 2523 mm etc.
Print A
9874 lines (approx. 418 mm, approx. 16.457 inches) to

59055 lines
420, 594, 841, 1189, mm

17, 18, 24, 36, 48 inches
Print B

9873 lines
297 mm
12 inches
Print C

6613 lines
210 mm
9, 11 inches
When incrementing the top edge registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is
shifted toward the direction opposite to the paper feed direction.
When incrementing the center registration adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shifted
to the left.
When incrementing the plotting length adjustment value, the drawing on the paper is shortened
in the papear feed direction.
When incrementing the cut length adjustment value, the cut length of the paper roll is shortened.
2-52
Table 2-4 Engine Control Parameter List (1/4)

No.
Description
PAPER
parameter
Standard
value
Input range
Unit of input
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

normal paper, A1 width paper roll
tracing paper, A0 width paper roll
film, A0 width paper roll
X-N0
X-N1
X-N2
X-N3
X-T0
X-T1
X-T2
X-T3
X-F0
X-F1
X-F2
X-F3
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

A-N0
A-N1
A-N2
A-N3
A-T0
A-T1
A-T2
A-T3
A-F0
A-F1
A-F2
A-F3
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
430
Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

B-N0
B-N1
B-N2
B-N3
B-T0
B-T1
B-T2
B-T3
B-F0
B-F1
B-F2
B-F3
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

C-N0
C-N1
C-N2
C-N3
C-T0
C-T1
C-T2
C-T3
C-F0
C-F1
C-F2
C-F3
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
400
649
Manual feed paper
SH
430
658
Waste toner bottle

(Set 1 when the large capacity waste toner bottle is installed.)
0, 1
0: Strike bottle
1: Does not strike
bottle
659
Type of process cartridge
0, 2
0: New type
(Type 2)
2: Old type
662
Process cartridge consumption over warning
0, 1
1: Warns.
0: Does not warn.
663
Front clip amount
71
0-255
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
Top edge
registration
adjustment
value
Standard value:
100
(300-500)
To front To rear
1 msec
(equivalent to 0.8
mm)
Reference:
1 mm=12.5
4 mm=50
8 mm=100
1 line
Reference
3 mm=71
2-53

No.
701
702
703
Center registration adjustment

value
704
Standard
value
Roll 1
R1
50
Roll 2
R2
50
Roll 3
R3
50
Manual feed paper
R4
50
708
Head A turn-on delay time
Head A (right side)
16
709
Head C turn-on delay time
Head C (left side)
16
710
Line memory write start bank
711
94
Input range
Unit of input
0-100
To light To left
8 dots
(equivalent to
0.338666 mm)
(equivalent to
0.01233
inches)
[Reference]
1 mm=2.95
0-65
90
87-93
Head B (center)
Fixed to 0
713
Head C (left side)
90
87-93
718
Paper roll (tracing paper),

print C
RT-C
1895
719
Paper roll (film), print C
RF-C
1895
Paper roll, print X
Ro-X
1915
Paper roll, print A
Ro-A
1915
722
Paper roll, print B
Ro-B
1909
723
Paper roll (plain paper),

print C
Ro-C
1985
724
Manual feed paper
SH
1915
Line memory
read start bank
720
721
728
Plotting length accuracy

adjustment value
Time conversion value of line quantity [line/sec]
731
1915
Head A (right side)
29
Head B (center)
29
733
Head C (left side)
29
734
Head A (right side)
Head B (center)
732
735
Strobe width
Strobe width step
736
Head C (left side)
737
Head A (right side)
Head B (center)
Head C (left side)
738
739
Strobe width step 2

(fine adjustment per drawing)
8 sec
Fixed to 94
Head A (right side)
712
2-54
PAPER
parameter
Description
1910 to 1936
Increased Reduced 1 Hz
1910-1936
1 line
15-39
0.0833 sec
2-8
1-6
0.0833 sec
Table 2-4 List of Engine Control Parameters (3/4)

No.
Roll paper
parameter
Description
Print X
Tracing paper
Standard
value
A0 width
equivalent roll paper
5940
741
A1 width
5930
742
A2 width
5920
743
A3 width
5910
A0 width
5940
745
A1 width
5930
746
A2 width
5920
747
A3 width
5910
A0 width
5940
A1 width
5930
740
Print X
Normal paper
744
Print A, B, C
Normal paper
748
749
750
Heat roller speed

adjustment value
A2 width
5920
A3 width
5910
A0 width
5900
753
A1 width
5890
754
A2 width
5880
755
A3 width
5870
A0 width
5940
757
A1 width
5930
758
A2 width
5920
759
A3 width
5910
751
Print A, B, C
Tracing paper
752
Print X, A, B, C
Film
756
Manual feed paper
760
762
Heat roller intermittent rotation

Mode 0: "59 seconds stop and 1 second rotatation" are repeated.
Mode 3: For 3 minutes alone immediately after printing
"10 seconds stop and 10 seconds rotation" are repeated and after
that "5959 seconds stop and 1 second rotation" are repeated.
Hint:
Input range
Standard value
+/-50
- Faster
+ Slower
Unit of input
value 1
Changing 10
increments or
decrements the
speed by 0.14
mm/sec
5930
0, 3
0: Mode 0
3: Mode 3
No.762 is effective from the engine version F/W version (2.20) and after
No. 658, 861 and 862 are effective from the engine F/W version (2.30) and
after
2-55

No.
PAPER
parameter
Standard
value
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
Print X, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

film ,A2 width paper roll
X-N0
X-N1
X-N2
X-N3
X-T0
X-T1
X-T2
X-T3
X-F0
X-F1
X-F2
X-F3
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
Print A, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

A-N0
A-N1
A-N2
A-N3
A-T0
A-T1
A-T2
A-T3
A-F0
A-F1
A-F2
A-F3
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Print B, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

B-N0
B-N1
B-N2
B-N3
B-T0
B-T1
B-T2
B-T3
B-F0
B-F1
B-F2
B-F3
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
Print C, normal paper, A0 width paper roll

C-N0
C-N1
C-N2
C-N3
C-T0
C-T1
C-T2
C-T3
C-F0
C-F1
C-F2
C-F3
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
300
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
Cut length
adjustment
value
Input range
Unit of input
Standard value
200
(100 to 500)
longer shorter
1 line
(equivalent to
0.042333 mm)
(equivalent to
0.001667
inches)
Reference:
1 mm=23.62
4.23 mm=100
8.47 mm=200
0.1667
inches=100
0.5 inches=300
1.0 inches=600
850
Rear edge margin for print X

(When the margin is ensured, the cut length of the paper
roll will be increased by that margin.)
0-4500
1 line
Reference
120 mm=2835
4.725 inches
861
How to stop the slitter cutter motor
0, 1
0: Without
brake
1: With brake
0, 1
0: [m] Display
in meter
1: [ft] Display
in feet
862
2-56
Description
Switching between the display in meter and feet
(2) Operation for selecting the parameter number

2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode, or engine control parameter number.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to set and entered the parameter, the RAM value of the
specified engine control parameter can be changed.
5 If non operable parameter number is specified, the [ENTER] key is inactive.
<12>
P A R AME T E R
12<601>
430
430
(To next page)
12<602>
430
430
(To next page)
12<864>
The ENTER
key is
inactive.
12<865>
The ENTER
key is
inactive.
2-57
(3) Operation for changing the parameter of the RAM value

Indicate the change operation engine control parameter of the RAM value.
In the example shown below, you should change the RAM value of parameter number 602 from
430 to 420.
1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the RAM value on the second line is marked
with angle brackets.
2 Press the [ ] key to move the underscore to the left (digit).
3 Press the [ ] key to reduce "3" marked with the underscore to "2."
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed (set and entered), the RAM value is changed and the
maintenance code12, subcode 602 display come back.
5 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing
the RAM value.
12<602>
4 30
4 30
602 DISPLAYED"

(Return to previous page )
12 - 602
<
430
4 3 0>
(Move the underscore to the

adjacent left digit)
12 - 602
<
430
4 3 0>
(Reduce "3" to "2")
12 - 602
<
430
4 2 0>
12<602>
4 30
4 20
Change the RAM value (NVRAM value is not

changed)
For the save method of parameter used to make the NVRAM value identical to the RAM value,
see "Section 2.3.13 (3) Operation for saving the parameter."
2-58
2.3.13 Maintenance Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM)

(1) Function
Operates the NVRAM value of engine control parameter.
Maintenance
Subcode
code
Display
Function
Refer item
01
13<01> RAM>NVRAM
Save Parameter
Saves RAM values of engine

control parameters to NVRAM.
2.3.13
(3)
02
13<02> ROM>NNVRAM
Parameter Initialize
Initializes RAM values of engine

control parameters
2.3.13
(4)
13
(2) Operation for selecting the NVRAM operation

2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the desired subcode.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to set and enter the operation for NVRAM, you can
execute the operation.
<13>
NVR AM
1 3 < 0 1 > R AM > N V R AM

S a v e P a r ame t e r
(To next page)
13<02>
R O M > NV R A M
P a r ame t e r I n i t i a l i z e
(To page 2.61)
2-59
(3) Operation for saving the parameter

This following describes operation to save the RAM value of an engine control parameter to
NVRAM after it is changed with maintenance code 11 or 12. The value saved to NVRAM will be
loaded to RAM when the device is turned on.
1 Select and enter subcode 01, the confirmation message appears to ask if you really want to
save the engine control parameter.
2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed in response to the message, the RAM value of the engine
control parameter is saved to NVRAM.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the RAM value is not saved to NVRAM.
"MAINTENANCE CODE 13 SUBCODE 01 DISPLAY"
1 3 < 0 1 > R A M > N V R A M

Sa v e P a r ame t e r
13<01>
(
R A M > N V R A M
S a v e OK ?
)
1 3 < 0 1 > R A M > N V R A M

S a v e En d
)
The display appears

2 to 3 seconds after
2-60
The RAM value is saved to NVRAM
(4) Operation for initializing the NAVRAM

This following describes operation to reset the NVRAM value of the engine control parameter to
the default (ROM value).
1 Select and enter subcode 02, the confirmation message appears.
2 When the ENTER key is pressed in response to the message, the NVRAM value of the engine
control parameter is reset to the ROM value.
3 When the CANCEL key is pressed, the NVRAM value is not reset.

DISPLAY"
1 3 < 0 2 > R O M > N V R A M

P a r ame t e r I n i t i a l i z e
13 - 02
R OM > N V R A M
I n i t i a l i z e OK ? )
1 3 < 0 2 > ROM > N V R AM

I n i t i a l i z e End
)
The display appears

2 to 3 seconds after
The NVRAM value is reset to the default (ROM value)
Since defaults are optimal to each engine firmware version, some of them may differ from the
standard values shown on the engine control parameter lists.
2-61
2.3.14 Maintenance Code 14 "USER PARAMETER" (User-defined engine parameter)

(1) Function
Change the user-defined engine parameters.
Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode. The change will
not affect the controller settings.
Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
01
02
14
03
04
05
2-62
Display
14<01> Densit
NORMAL :3
14<02> Power Save
OFF :0
14<03> D.Open Cut
OFF :0
14<04> E.Cut Timer
OFF :0
14<05> T-paper mode
MODE1 :1
Function
Displays and changes the "print density."
Displays and changes the "power save set."
Displays and changes the "door open cut."
Displays and changes the "top edge cut timer."
Displays and changes the "tracing paper mode."
(2) Operation for selecting the user-defined engine parameter

2 Select the user-defined engine parameter using [ ] or [ ] key.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, you can change the
specified user defined engine parameter.
< 1 4 >USER
P A RAM
14<01>
Den s i t y
NORMA L
(To next page)
:3
14<02>
Powe r
Save
OFF : 0
(To next page)
14<04>
E . Cu t
T i me r
OFF : 0
(To next page)
14<05>
T - p a p e r mo d e
MO D E 1 : 1
(To next page)
2-63
(3) Operation for changing the user-defined engine parameter

This following describes operation to change the user-defined engine parameter.
In the example shown below, you should change "Density" from "Normal" to "Thick"
(subcode 01).
1 After the desired parameter is select and entered, the parameter value on the second line is
marked with angle brackets.
2 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance
code 14, subcode 01display comes back.
3 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without
changing the parameter.
14<01>
Den s i t y
NORMA L
"MAINTENANCE CODE 14 DISPLAYED"
: 3
14 - 01
<
De n s i t y
NORMA L
: 3>
14 - 01
Den s i t y
<RATHER TH I CK
: 4>
14 - 01
<
:5>
Den s i t y
TH I CK
14 - 01
Den s i t y
TH I CK
Change the print density to thick.
2-64
:5
Select user-defined engine control parameter values from the table below:
"Print density" setting
<
THIN :1>
< RATHER THIN :2>

<
NORMAL :3>
<RATHER THICK :4>

<
THICK :5>
Description
1: Thin
2: Slightly thin
3: Normal
4: Slightly thick
5: Thick
"Power Save" setting

<
OFF :0>
(Default)
Description
0: Does not enter the power save mode.
(Default)
<15min-LEVEL1 :1>
1: Enters the level 1 power save mode after 15 minutes.
<30min-LEVEL1 :2>
<60min-LEVEL1 :3>
<90min-LEVEL1 :4
<15min-LEVEL2 :5>
<30min-LEVEL2 :6>
<60min-LEVEL2 :7
<90min-LEVEL2 :8>
LEVEL1: The fixation temperature is decreased to 100C. When the temperature reaches 100C,
halogen lamps are operated (i.e. turn-on or turn-off).
LEVEL2: The halogen lamp is completely turned off.
"Door Open Cut" setting
Description
<OFF :0>
0: Off (The door open cut is not executed.)
< ON :1>
1: On (the door open cut is executed.)
"Top Edge Cut Timer" setting
(Default)
Description
< OFF :0>
0: Off (The edge cut is not executed.)
< 30min :1>
1: 30 minutes
< 60min :2>
2: 60 minutes (1 hour)
<120min :3>
3: 120 minutes (2 hours)
<240min :4>
4: 240 minutes (4 hours)
< 1min :5>
5: Approx. 1 minute
< 5min :6>
6: 5 minutes
< 10min :7>
7: 10 minutes
"Tracing paper Mode" setting
(Default)
Description
<MODE1 :1>
1: Mode 1
<MODE2 :2>
2: Mode 2
(Default)
2-65
2.3.15 Maintenance Code 15 "ROLL WIDTH" (Paper roll print width)

(1) Function
Change the print width of roll paper.
Changing the parameter value is only available in the engine maintenance mode.
The change will not affect the controller settings.
Even when the value has been changed, turning on the device resets the value to the default.
Maintenance
code
Subcode
Display
01
15<01> A0-Roll
841mm
02
15<02> A1-Roll
594mm
03
15<03> A2-Roll
420mm
04
15<04> A3-Roll
297mm
15
2-66
Function
Displays and changes
width that is judged to
paper width.
paper width.
paper width.
paper width.
the paper roll print

be equivalent to A0
be equivalent to A1
be equivalent to A2
be equivalent to A3
(2) Operation for selecting the paper roll print width

2 Select the roll width using [ ] or [ ] key.
3 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select the user defin engine parameter.
4 When the [ENTER] key is pressed to select and enter the parameter, the print width can be
changed.
<15>
RO L L
WI DTH
15<01>
A0 - Ro l l
8 4 1 mm
(To next page)
15<02>
A1 - Ro l l
5 9 4 mm
(To next page)
15<03>
A2 - Ro l l
4 2 0 mm
(To next page)
15<04>
A3 - Ro l l
2 9 7 mm
(To next page)
2-67
(3) Operation for changing the paper roll print width

This following describes operation to change for print width of the paper roll.
In the example shown below, you should change the print width of the paper roll, which is judged
to be equivalent to subcode 01 and A0 paper width, from "841 mm" to "36 inch."
1 After the desired parameter is set and entered, the parameter value on the second line is marked
with angle brackets.
2 Press the [ ] or [ ] key until "36 inch" appears on the display.
3 When the [ENTER] key is pressed, the parameter value is changed and the maintenance
code15, subcode 01 display comes back.
4 When the [CANCEL] key is pressed, the device returns to the home display without changing
the parameter value.
15<01>
01 DISPLAY"
A0 - Ro l l
8 4 1 mm

15 - 01
A0 - Ro l l
<
8 4 1 mm >
15 - 01
A0 - Ro l l
< 8 8 0 mm >
,
15 - 01
Indicate the default.
A0 - Ro l l
<
36
>
15 - 01
A0 - Ro l l
36
Change the "841 mm" to "36 inch."
2-68
Select the print width of the paper roll from the table below:
A0 width equivalent paper roll
Meaning of value
< 841mm>
841 mm: A0 width
< 880mm>
880 mm
< 900mm>
900 mm
< 910mm>
910 mm
< 914mm>
914 mm
< 30 " >
30 inch = 762.0 mm
< 34 " >
34 inch = 863.6 mm
< 36 " >
36 inch = 914.4 mm
(default)
Meaning of value
< 594mm>
594 mm :A1 width
< 610mm>
610 mm
< 620mm>
620 mm
< 700mm>
700 mm
< 707mm>
707 mm
< 22 " >
22 inch = 558.8 mm
< 24 " >
24 inch = 609.6 mm
(default)
Meaning of value
< 297mm>
297 mm :A3 width
< 310mm>
310 mm
< 11 " >
11 inch = 279.4 mm
< 12 " >
12 inch = 304.8 mm
(default)
Meaning of value
< 297mm>
297 mm :A3 width
< 310mm>
310 mm
< 11 " >
11 inch = 279.4 mm
< 12 " >
12 inch = 304.8 mm
(default)
2-69
2.3.16 Maintenance Code 16 "PROCESS LOG" (Process Cartridge Consumption Log)

(1) Function
This code displays the information on up to ten latest process cartridges replaced in the past.
Maintenance
Subcode
code
01
02
16
:
10
Display
16<01>[0002]
03-06(09:30) 120
16<02>[0001]
03-05(18:32) 5400m
:
16<10>[
Function
Displays the latest process cartridge
information.
Displays the second latest process cartridge
information.
:
Displays the tenth latest process cartridge
information. (If there is no information, the
error code is left blank.)
The process cartridge information is displayed as follows:
Process cartridge number
16<01> [ 0002 ]
03 - 06 ( 09 : 30 )
Final application date and time

Month/day, hour/minute
(March 6, 9H30M)
2-70
1 2 0m
Process cartridge consumption

[Distance]
(120 m)
(2) Operation for displaying the process cartridge consumption log

Enter the Maintenance Code," the process cartridge information of the maintenance code
16, subcode 01 is displayed initially.
2 Using the [ ] or [ ] key, select desired subcodes to display and check settings one after
another.
<16>
P ROCE S S
L OG
"MAINTENANCE CODE16 DISPLAY"
16<01> [ 0002 ]
03 - 06 ( 09 : 30 )
1 2 0m
16<02> [ 0001 ]
03 - 05 ( 18 : 32 )
5 4 0 0m
16<09> [
16<10> [
2-71
2.4
Message
The table below lists the messages displayed on the second line of the LCD during operations on
the device such as printing, and their meanings.
Message
(
Warming up 12345
Printing
During printing
Print End
The printout is normally terminated.
Print Stop
The machine is executing the print stop process.
Execution
The machine is executing the operation.
End
The operation is completed.
Stop
The machine is executing the operation stop process.
Door Open
The door is opened.
Door8 Open
Door 8 (manual paper feed holder) is opened. (When manual

feed is not used, door 8 must be closed.)
Toner Empty
The toner is run out.
TonerDoor Open
The toner inner door is opened.
WT-Bottle Full
The waste toner bottle is filled.
WT-Bottle Off
The waste toner bottle is not mounted.
Process Off
The process cartridge is not mounted.
Paper End
Paper JAM [3400]
ERROR [2038]
Message
2-72
Description
The machine is warming up.
The figure is a countdown time.
The paper is run out.

Paper jam occurred,
(The figure in the brackets is error code. )
Unrecoverable error occurred.
(The figure in the brackets is error code.
Description
Set date&time!
NVRAM is not initialized. (The time is also not set.)

The initialized pattern is rewritten.
SW4 DIPSW-1:ON
Bit 1 of the 8-bit DIP switch (SW5) is set to the ON position.
Chapter 3 Maintenance Person Mode
Chapter 3
Maintenance Person Mode
This device supports the maintenance person mode that cannot be defined by users. Chapter 3
describes functions and operations of those menus specific to maintenance people. To access and
use this mode, you must enter the password.
3.1
Enter to Maintenance Person Mode
Data wait display
1 Press the
PR I NT
READY
key to activate the offline mode.
Setup display
MENU
# SETUP
2 Press the keys in the following order.
P A S S WO R D
I N P U T MO D E
3 Enter the password by pressing the keys in the following order.
The display appears as shown right
I NPUT
LEVEL
OK
003
and the display enters the

maintenance person mode.
MENU
# SETUP
The above operating sequence is the same as user-defined menus. When the setup is completed
key is pressed to return to the data prompt display, the maintenance person mode is
and the
automatically quitted.
3-1
3.2
Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus
Maintenance person's special menu supports 16 options as shown below. (1) - (3) are the menu
options in the function menus, (4) - (14) are that of the system menus, and (15) and (16) are that
of the device menu.
HINT: The parameter marked with underscore (_) is a factory default.
(1) HDD FORMAT (FUNCTION)
Function:
Performs the formats of internal hard disk.
(2) NVRAM FORMAT (FUNCTION)

Function:
Performs the formats of NVRAM.
(3) VERSION UPGRADE (FUNCTION)

Function:
Performs version upgrading of the system firmware using the maintenance CF

card.
(4) FACTORY SET (SYSTEM)

Function:
Initializes the parameter of user defined item. However, the device serial number is not initialized.
(5) SERIAL NO (SYSTEM)

Function:
Parameter:
Enter the serial number of the plotter.

00000 to 65535 (decimal number)
(6) CUSTOM (POINT PLOT) (SYSTEM - SYSTEM CUSTOM)

Function:
This parameter determines whether "POINT PLOT" will be displayed with the
HPGL format parameter.
Parameter:
OFF: Not display
ON: Display
Supplementary explanation:
Selecting "ON" for this setting allows modifying setting of the following parameters with HPGL format parameters.
Designation: POINT PLOT
ON: A single point is plotted. (Default)
OFF: A single point is not plotted.
(7) SNMP TRAP NUM. (SYSTEM - COMM.- PARAM. - ETHRNET - DETAIL ITEM)
3-2
Function:
Specifies the number of SNMP TRAP tables. The TRAP table refers to the
Parameter:
table accessed from "TRAPnn Manager" to "TRAPnn: PORT."

1 to 20 (Default: 2)
(8) ALTERNATIVE INTERFACE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - USB)

Function:
This parameter enables or disables the alternative setup for the USB interface.
The default setting is OFF. This parameter is used together with SIIT's PC
driver. When the user does not want to use SIIT's driver and desires to establish
IEEE1284-compatible communications controlled under the printer device
class, which is defined according to the USB interface, you should select ALTERNATIVE INTERFACE.
Parameter :
OFF : Invalid
ON : Valid
(9) TIMING MODE (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function:
Setting:
Specifies the parallel interface communication conditions (signal timing).

NORMAL
FAST
SLOW
MANUAL (Displayed the maintenance person defined level mode.)
(10) ACK ON TIME (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function:
Parameter:
Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE on time.

(11) ACK PULSE (30 ns) (SYSTEM - COM PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function:
Setting:
Specifies ACKNOWLEDGE pulse width.

(12) BUSY OFF TIMING (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function:
Parameter:
Specifies BUSY signal off timing.

ACK FALL EDGE
ACK RISE EDGE
(13) SELECT SIGNAL (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function:
Parameter:
Specifies whether the SELECT signal is turned on or off.

ON:
Always turned on (active).
OFF/ON:
The setting varies depending on whether the device is in online
or offline state.
(14) AF SIGNAL DIR. (SYSTEM - COMM. PARAMETER - PARALLEL)

Function:
Parameter:
Specifies AF (auto feed) signal direction.

INPUT:
The AF signal is handled as input.
OUTPUT: The AF signal is handled as output.
3-3
(15) Special setting 2 (Device)

Function
Parameters
Used from the Web when adjusting the scanner.

00 - FF Default value: 00
(16) Special setting 3 (Device)

Function
Parameter
3-4
Selects whether an error of H/W on MRC2 board (PES under run error) is to
detected or not.
(This parameter should normally be set to OFF)
OFF: Does not detect the error
ON: Detects the error
3.3
How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web
<Procedure>
1 See the "remote control startup procedure" in the User's Guide and display the plotter's web
screen.
2 Enter password CSCCSUDR (8 upper case characters in half-size) to the password input area
of the menu on the left side of the page and then click [Login].
3.4
Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions
If a trouble occurred at a user, using the "Maintenance Information Acquisition" function allows
collecting the information necessary to locate the cause of a controller error.
<Procedure>
1 Log in the maintenance person mode of the Web
2 Click "Maintenance" on the left side of the page to display the maintenance page.
3 Click "3. Maintenance Information" on the "Maintenance " page to display the "Special
maintenance" page.
4 Click [Upload] to save the information file to PC.
5 Return to the "Maintenance" page and click "5. All Ports and PDL Parameters Import/Export"
to display the "Ports & PDL Import/Export" page for All ports and All PDL setting.
6 Click [Export] to save the setup file to PC.
7 When above operations were implemented from a user's PC, finally enter "logout" in the
password field of the menu and click [Login]. Make sure the display above the password field
is changed to Level: "user".
3-5
Chapter 4 Regular Inspection
Chapter 4
Regular Inspection
This chapter describes regular inspection and maintenance.
4-1
4.1
Regular Inspection Operation Items and Procedure
The regular inspection must be executed every 12 months, as a rule. On the other hand, 6 month
interval is recommended for the preventive maintenance that is necessary to maintain the
acceptable image quality. Table 4-1 below lists regular inspection items and procedures.
Note: Before replacing a part, be sure to contact the user and obtain his/her
approval.
Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List
(1 / 2)
No.
Item
Cleaning Replacement*
Refer to
Operation check of single plotter
Execute "MENU PRINT" in the function menu

to check
User's
manual
Check the plotting specifications

and image quality
Enter the engine maintenance mode and output

engine test patterns to check and evaluate the
specifications and quality.
(Test pattern) No.15
(Paper feed position) Upper and lower ports
(Paper size) All sizes
(Number of outputs) 1 sheet, each
2.2.10
Inspection of gas spring
When the spring has reached the end of service

life (the replacement timing is indicated on the
warning label (see page v)), replace the part.
8.2.35
Cleaning of SLA
Clean the SLA (LED head lens) with a cotton

cloth.
5 km
Dampen a rag with water and wring it

Cleaning of roller (1) and rollers on
sufficiently, and wipe the toner off on each roller
both sides of head
surface.
5 km
150 km
Cleaning of charge wires (2) and

(3).
Use cotton seagull soused in ethanol (ethyl

alcohol) for the cleaning.
5 km
20 km
(Wire)
Cleaning of DEV seat
Wipe the toner off the DEV seat with a dry cotton
cloth.
5 km
Cleaning of bottom foretranscription guide
Dampen a rag with water and wring it

sufficiently, and wipe the toner off on the bottom
fore-transcription guide.
5 km
If the parts are heavily soiled, dampen a rag with

Cleaning of pinch and registration
water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe the
rollers, cutaway rollers, pinch roller
toner and paper chips off on each roller surface.
ASSY.
After the cleaning, dry the parts completely.
10 km
10
Check of replacement timing of

developer unit
100 km
5 km
100 km
When the toner has been spilled out, wipe off the
toner.
5 km
100 km
When the cover is heavily soiled, clean the inside

wall with a vacuum cleaner.
5 km
When the rollers are heavily soiled, dampen a rag

with water and wring it sufficiently, and wipe
each roller surface. After the cleaning, dry the
parts completely.
Execute the cleaning for both upper and lower
stages of the paper feed unit.
10 km
11 Cleaning of DV spacer
12
Cleaning the seats of magnet rolls

R and L
13 Cleaning of DEVT cover
14
4-2
Operation
Cleaning of paper feed, remaining,

and rewind rollers
When the developer unit has reached the end of

service life, replace the part.
When the spacer is heavily soiled, wipe it with a
dry cloth while turning the roller.
Note: Do not touch the magnet roller with bare
hands.
Chapter 4 Regular Inspection
Table 4-1 Regular Inspection Item List

(2 / 2)
No.
Item
Operation
Cleaning
Replacement*
Refer to
10 km
10 km
100 km
5 km
100 km
5 km
100 km
5 km
100 km
Open the rear cover and remove paper chips.

15 Cleaning of slitter cutter
16
Cleaning of out fuser separation

finger
Inspection of fuser thermistors

17
(TH01, TH02, TH04)
Cleaning of heat and backup

18
rollers
Note: Be careful that you will not be injured by

the cutter blade.
When the ends of the separation finger are
heavily soiled by the toner, wipe it off with a rag.
When the parts have reached the end of service
life, replace them.
Note: Pay attention not to bend the leaf spring
fixed.
Dampen a cotton cloth with heat roller cleaner
and wipe each roller surface.
Note: Wipe the cleaned surfaces with a dry
cloth.
Check the mount condition.
**
19
Check of belt (TRANS)
20
Confirmation of user's operating

environment
Check whether the user has used the device under

the specified operating conditions, including
temperature and humidity.
21
Confirmation of consumable
parts
Check whether the user is using the consumable

parts specified by Seiko I Infotech.
Note: Pay attention not to break the arm of

PS06 for the belt
Figures in this column are only criteria. The replacement timing depends on the actual operating
environment and cleaning intervals. You can see cleaning and replacement intervals, using
maintenance code 02 and 03 in the engine criteria maintenance mode (see Sections 2.3.2 and
2.3.3).
Before restarting the device after the completion of necessary inspections, clean the interior of the
machine.
4-3
Chapter 5 Troubleshooting (Controller Error)
Chapter 5
Troubleshooting (Controller Error)
This chapter describes troubleshooting where an error occurred in the controller. If a trouble
occurs on the device, the error lamp is turned on. (In case of warning, the lamp is not lit.) In
addition, an error message appears on the LCD. When the error message is displayed, find the
cause and place and remove the trouble. If the error message is not displayed, judge the place
based on the symptom and remove the trouble. Classified errors and codes supported errors are
identified by 4-digit hexadecimal numbers (example: E E56E-01FF).
5.1
Type of Error Messages
Error messages are classified into four categories as shown below according to the type of
trouble.
(1) Operator call error
This error message shows troubles that the operator can handle: for example, replacement of
consumables. Operator call errors are further classified into errors that the operator can handle
and those that our Service Center must handle.
(2) Operator report warning
This error message is the warning information addressed to the operator: for example,
replacement of consumables is oncoming.
(3) Warning
This error message shows incomplete system environment or setup: for example, communication
error or faulty data.
(4) Service call error
This error message shows troubles that are attributable to defective parts, faulty media, or
program error, and must be handled by our Service Center.
5-1
5.2
Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error
"Operator call errors" can be handled by the operator. When this type of error occurs, you should
request the user to troubleshoot the machine based on the error message displayed. If the same
symptom recurs frequently, you should remove the trouble according to the instructions
described in "Chapter 6 Maintenance Person."
(For detailed descriptions on troubles relating to door open / close and consumables, see the
user's guide.)
CLOSE
DOOR
Description:
The roll 1 drawer is opened.
Measure:
Close the roll 1 drawer.
CLOSE
DOOR
Description:
The roll 2 drawer is opened. (For 2- or 3-tray model)
Measure:
CLOSE
DOOR
Description:
The roll 3 drawer is opened (For 3-tray model).
Measure:

O P E N DOOR X , X
R E MO V E P A P E R
OP E N DOOR X
R EMO V E P A P E R
One door is displayed
Two or more doors are displayed
Description:
The paper is jammed in the machine.
Measure:
Troubleshoot the machine according to the guidance displayed.
S E T U P I S WR O N G
# I N I T I AL SET
Description:
The machine detects the damaged setup area checksum after powering on.
Measure:
Press
key to display the default setting selection screen.
Using
5-2
SET
THE
and
, select and execute the type of the default setting.
S / N
Description:
This error message may appear if the serial number at powering on is not specified.
Measure:
Specify the serial number of the device. (see Section 5.10 Serial Number Not Set.)
5.3
Operator Notice Warning
W S P OO L
J O B WA S
I N I T I A L I ZED
DE L ETED
Description:
The saved job has been damaged, and thus the spool area is initialized (When
HDD is installed).
Measure:
After 3 seconds, the message changes to "WAIT A MOMENT" and then the
device starts.
J O B WA S
DE L ETED
Description:
The data is received in the format not supported by the device, and thus the data
was ignored.
Measure:
Use the data received in the format supported by this device.
W S P OO L
ERROR
Description:
The spool area on the HDD has been damaged, and thus the memory spool area
is used (When HDD is installed).
Measure:
Replace the HDD
W N VRAM
Description:
Measure:
ERROR
The nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 Board)
is damaged. Usual printing is executable while some functions do not work
correctly. Currently, only the accounting information printout function in the
function menu is affected by this error.
Execute NVRAM format in the function menu. If the error is not removed,
D E L E T E J OB ?
Y = ENT ER N= CANCE L
Description:
This message appears if there is an unprocessed job (jobs standing by for processing) at powering on.
Measure:
Select whether the job is deleted or not by pressing the
key or
key.
The operation goes in time out in about 10 seconds unless the key is pressed,
and the device starts with the job save.
5-3
Table 5-1 If a Job has been Left at Powering on
Job status
Standing for
processing
Display
DELETE JOB?
Transaction
Job is deleted by designation.
Processing
Job is automatically moved to "already

processed" job.
Processed
Jobs are automatically deleted from the

oldest job in order.
W UN - I N I T .
NVRAM
Description:
This message appears if the nonvolatile memory (NVRAM) on the PCBASSY-MRC2 (MRC2 board) is not initialized.
Measure:
The display of this warning message remains until the

After the
key is pressed.
key was pressed, the NVRAM is initialized automatically and
the display changes to the language setting specifically for the installing operation.
5-4
5.4
Warning
5.4.1
Communication Error
A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the
computer and the device.
This type of error can be handled by the system administrator of the user.
Note:
A communication error appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next
operation is performed. Consequently, you may not find the that error
occurred. In such a case, retransmit the data to check if the communication
error is displayed on the LCD.
(1) Ethernet interface

W
I NTERFACE - LN
nnnn
nnn: Error code
Table 5-2 Ethernet Warning List

Error code
Description
0101
Duplication of XPT port number
0212
Lack of internal memory
Measure
Correct machine settings.
If the device is not recovered from this error by

turning the power off and on, take the following
Host disconnects the communication forcibly while a measures:
connection is established
Check if the protocol matches the specifications
The device failed communication while communication of computer, or
Replace the connection cable, or
time out data is transferred
Check the communication condition from the
Communication connection system error
online monitor. (Recommended monitor: Sniffer)
Communication system internal error
0220 to 022F Protocol data sent from the host is defective

0250 to 025F
0260 to 026F
1000 to 4FFF
5000 to 7FFF
(2) Mail interface

W
I NTERFACE - ML
nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-3 Mail Warning List

Error code
Description
1100 to 11FF
SMTP server address is not specified.
1200 to 12FF
SMTP server is not found.
1300 to 1AFF
SMPT server ignored protocol, or SMPT server

does not respond.
1B00 to 1BFF
SMPT server ignored the terminating

processing.
Measure
Specify the SMTP server address.
Check the SMPT server for its address setting

and the SMPT server host for its status, setting,
and connection.
5-5
(3) USB interface
I NTERFACE - US
nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-4 USB Warning List

Error code
Description
Measure
0300 to 04FF Lack of internal memory

2100 to 24FF
0100 to 01FF
1000 to 1FFF
2000 to 2FFF
5.4.2
If the device is not recovered from this error by

turning the power off and on, take the following
Protocol data sent from the host is defective
measures:
The device failed communication while communication Check if the protocol matches the specifications
time out data is transferred
of computer, or
Replace the connection cable, or
Communication connection system error
Check the communication condition from the
online monitor.
Communication system internal error
PDL Warning
A communication error message appears if any communication error occurs between the
computer and the device. When a PLD error occurs, you can return the LP-1010 to the normal
operation from the screen shown below.
Note:
The PDL warning appears on the LCD, but it disappears when the next
operation is performed. Consequently, you may not recognize the that error
occurred. It is recommended that the "ERROR MEMO" of "DRAWING
PARAM." in the setup menu be turned on, so that the error message is
printed on the drawing.
W DATA
nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-5 PDL Warning List

(1 / 2)
Error
code
Description
0201
W COMMAND ERROR
HP-GL or HP-GL/2 command not

supported was received.
0202
W # OF PARAM. ERROR
The number of parameters of HP-GL

or HP-GL/2 command is wrong.
0203
5-6
Printed error memo title
W PARAM._RANGE_ERR
Measure
Correct erroneous part at the

The plotting instruction that exceeds computer side.
the range supported by HP-GL or HPGL/2 command, or the plotting
instruction that uses illegal characters
was received.
Table 5-5 PDL Warning List

(2 / 2)
Error
code
Printed error memo title
0205
W UNDEFINED COMMAND
Character set instruction of HP-GL or

HP-GL/2 command not supported
computer side.
was received.
0207
W POLYGON_BFFR_ERR

Polygon buffer overflow error
computer side. (Polygon buffer
occurred.
upper limit: 106600 points)
0208
(No error memo)
Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if

effective plotting data exists in HP- effective plotting data is
GL command.
transferred.
0209
W CHAR._OVERFLOW
There is no empty area in memory for Correct so as to reduce the

user registered characters of HP-GL number of registrations or data by
(DL/UC command).
one character.
0300
W PATTERN OVERFLOW
There are too many pattern

Reduce the pattern registrations in
registrations in one drawing and the
one drawing.
pattern memory overflows.
0301
W HATCH OVERFLOW
There are too many hatch

Reduce the hatch registrations in
registrations in one drawing and the
one drawing.
pattern memory overflows.
0303
W CHAR._OVERFLOW
Correct so as to reduce the

There is no empty area in memory for
number of registrations or data by
user registered characters of HP-GL.
one character.
0305
W SPOOL OVERFLOW
The spool memory overflows.
Install optional HDD, or specify

the CENTERING = OFF if the
device is used with the
CENTERING = ON.
0306
W POLYGON OVERFLOW

Polygon buffer overflow error
computer side. (Polygon buffer
occurred.
upper limit: 106600 points)
0307 to W PDL ERR 307 to

0313
W PDL ERR 313
Description
Program warning
Measure
If the error is reproducible and the

print result is poor, the software must
be upgraded to the latest version.
0314
W DATA IGNORED
Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if effective

effective plotting data.
plotting data is transferred.
0400
W RASTER_DECODE_ERR
Check the computer side if the

The format of the compressed raster
format of the compressed raster
data is erroneous.
data is correct.
0401
W RASTER_FORMAT_ERR
T h e r e i s n o r a s t e r d a t a o f t h e s i z e Check the computer side if data is

specified by the data.
correct.
0500 to
(No error memo)
0505
Program warning
If the error is reproducible and the

print result is poor, the software must
be upgraded to the latest version.
0600
W FORMATERROR
TIFF data is erroneous. Or, the device

failed plotting due to an omission of
essential tag.
0601
W # OF PARAM. ERROR

The number of parameters of TIFF
computer side.
data tag is wrong.
0602
W PARAM._RANGE_ERR
The parameter value of TIFF data tag

exceeds the supported range.
0603
(No error memo)
Data is ignored, because there is no Check the computer side if effective

effective plotting data in TIFF data. plotting data is transferred.
0700
(No error memo)
The device failed plotting due to an

omission of essential record in the
computer side.
CALS format.
5-7
5.4.3
Engine Warning
This error occurs when image data is transferred from the controller to the engine.
When this error occurs, the image data has not been transferred to the engine correctly and,
therefore, the faulty data may be printed on the paper. Return the device to the normal operation
from the following job.
W E56E - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-6 Engine Control Warning List
Error code
Description
Measure
9001 to 900F
Hardware chip error

(plotter transfer error of gate array)
9011 to 901F
Hardware chip error

(scanner transfer error of gate array)
9021 to 90FF
Hardware chip error (gate array operation failure)
5.4.4
Reprint the faulty data. If the error is not removed,

replace a part or upgrade the firmware to the latest
version accordingly. In case of replacement,
change the RIP board or DRAM.
Main Warning
F0 6D - n nnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-7 List of Main Warnings
Error code
0801
0838
5-8
Description
Measure
Spool file error
This error often results from abnormal power-off.

If the error does not recur as power is turned on
again, there is no problem. If the error still
recurred as power is turned on again, confirm
with the user in what situation did the error
happened. Then replace the relevant parts or
upgrade F/W to the latest version. Target part is
RIP board (or, DRAM or HDD).
Judgment of PDL is not available from the data
If the error occurs on a specific set of data, a

problem on the data should be suspected. If the
error occurred on a set of data with which there
has been no trouble so far in its output, confirm
with the user in what situation the error resulted.
Then replace the relevant parts or upgrade F/W to
the latest version. Target part is RIP board (or,
DRAM or HDD).
5.5
Service Call Error
Service call errors are handled by our Service Center.

Hint:
5.5.1
When a service call error occurs, you should request the user to turn off the
device once and turn it on again to check whether the error is reproduced.
Restarting the machine may reset the error.
Engine Error
This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty.
E E NG I N E n n n n
P OW E R O F F / O N
5.5.2
Description:
nnnn: Error code

This error message may appear if the engine of the device is faulty.
Measure:
To correct error, see Chapter 6 "Troubleshooting (Engine Error)."
System Error
This error message may appear if an unrecoverable and exceptional system error occurs in the
controller of the device.
E FFFF - FFFF
5.5.3
Description:
An unexpected hardware or program error occurs.
Measure:
Hear from the user about the situation when the error occurred.
Upgrade the firmware to the latest version.
Check the hardware for connection.
Replace a part. In case of replacement, change the hard disk drive, DRAM, or
MRC2 board.
Controller Error
This error message may appear if an unrecoverable fatal error occurs in the module provided on
the controller of the device.
(1) Error in PDL module

E F064 - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-8 PDL Module Error List
Error code
Description
0380 to 039F
Program error
0A80 to 0A90
Measure
If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
turning it on again, hear from the user about the
situation when the error occurred, and replace a
part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version
accordingly. In case of replacement, change the
MRC2 board or DRAM.
5-9
(2) Error in Engine Control module
E E56E - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-9 Engine Control Module Error List
Error code
Description
Measure
0111 to 01FF
Program error (task boot error)
0201 to 02FF
0501 - 05FF
Program error (task-to-task communication error) If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
Program error
Hardware chip error (gate array error)
Engine communication error
MRC2 board or DRAM.
0601 - 06FF
Scanner communication error
1000 to 1FFF
0301 to 03FF
0401 to 04FF

hard disk drive or optional board (or MRC2 board
or DRAM).
Hard disk error
(3) Error in Operation module
E EF70 - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-10 Operation Module Error List
Error code
Description
Measure
0101
Program error (task boot synchronize error)
1000 to 1FFF
Program error

MRC2 board or DRAM.
(4) Error in Main module
E F06D - nnn n
nnnn: Error code
5-10
Table 5-11 Main Module Error List

Error code
0101
0111 to 01FF
0201 to 02FF
1000 to 1FFF
0301 to 03FF
0401 to 04FF
2000 to 2FFF
Description
Measure

Program error (task boot error)
Program error (task-to-task communication error) part or upgrade the firmware to the latest version
Program error
MRC2 board or DRAM.
NVRAM error

MRC2 board or DRAM.
Hard disk / RAM disk error
- If the device is not reset by turning it off once and

situation when the error occurred, and upgrade the
firmware to the latest version accordingly.
- Alternatively, check the power supply and data
cable that are connected to the hard disk drive.
If wrong connection is found, correct it.
- Check the power supply and data cable, which are
connected to the hard disk drive, for damage. If
either or both parts are damaged, replace it/them.
- In case of replacement, the hard disk drive,
optional board, change DRAM or MRC2 board.
Hardware configuration error
This error is attributable to incorrectly configured

hardware: for example, the standard panel is not
installed. Therefore, check the configuration and,
if troubles are found, replace a component or
upgrade the firmware to the latest version
panel, NVRAM, or MRC2 board.
(5) Error in Setup module

E F375 - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-12 Setup Error List
Error code
Description
0101
1000 to 1FFF
Program error
0301 to 03FF
0401 to 04FF
Measure
MRC2 board or DRAM.
NVRAM error

MRC2 board or DRAM.
Setup control file error

MRC2 board or DRAM.
5-11
(6) Error in panel control module
E F06E - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-13 Panel Control Module Error List
Error code
Description
Measure
0201
Program error (initial task interface error)
1000 to 1FFF
Program error

hard disk drive or optional board (or MRC2 board
or DRAM).
(7) Error in spool module

E F375 - nnnn
nnnn: Error code
Table 5-14 Spool Module Error List
Error code
Description
Storage access error
1001
5-12
<Cause>
* Logic failure of firmware.
* Disconnect of hard disk drive.
* Faulty of hard disk drive.
* Faulty of DRAM.
Measure
- If the device is not reset by turning it off once and
situation when the error occurred, and upgrade the
firmware to the latest version accordingly.
- Alternatively, check the power supply and data
cable that are connected to the hard disk drive. If
wrong connection is found, correct it.
- Check the power supply and data cable, which are
connected to the hard disk drive, for damage. If
either or both parts are damaged, replace it/them.
- In case of replacement, the hard disk drive,
change DRAM or MRC2 board.
5.6
Error Log
Each time an error or warning occurs in the device, it is displayed on the LCD and also the error
log information is saved in the internal memory.
The error log information saved in the internal memory includes additionally the time when an
error occurred, and therefore you can confirm the error log using the "ERROR PRINT" of the
function menu.
(This information is saved even after the power was turned off.)
5.6.1
Classification of Error/Warning
The type of error/warning is classified as follows:
1 Classification: E (Service Call)
2 Classification: O (Operator Call)
3 Classification: W (Warning)
5.6.2
An unrecoverable error that needs service person's

measures.
An error that the operator can take measures.
A warning, such as expiration of service life of
consumables and data error occurred.
Format of Message
Each error/warning message to be logged if an error or warning occurs identifies one character (+
space) at the top the of message as the error/warning identifier.
The log message is composed of alphanumerics and thus it does not necessarily match the
message displayed on the LCD.
The error/warning message registered as log information is prepared in the format mentioned
below.
5.6.3
Log Registration Format

An error or warning displayed on the LCD is registered as log information in the following
format.
Case 1
Case 2
Case 3
"yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a bbbb-cccc"

"yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss cccc"
"yyyy/mm/dd hh:mm:ss a ssssssss"
yyyy/mm/dd
hh:mm:ss
a
bbbbcccc
ssssssss
year/month/day
hour:minute:second
Error/warning identifier (common to LCD display)
Error classification (hexadecimal notation)
Error code (hexadecimal notation may be omitted)
Optional alphanumeric message (may be omitted)
*Log example
"2004/05/24 12:31:55 E ENGINE 2030"
Error number:2030=Power supply failure

5-13
5.6.4
Error Log Print Item

Table 5-15 Error Log Print Item
Header information
Print item
Log media
Type of log media (log storage position)

HDD : Hard disk drive
FLASH : Flash memory
Max log number
Number of registrable logs

HDD : 8191
FLASH :1023
Log size
Log size per information: 16 bytes
Log set count
Number of registered logs
Error information
Print item
Log
Storage position (1 to 8191)
Date
Error generation date (D/M/Y)
Time
Error generation time
Information
Error message:
E sssssss
W sssssss
O sssssss
5.6.5
E: Fatal error (service call error)

W: Warning error
O: Operator intervention error
Type of Error Log

The errors are classified as follows.
The following log examples show the information saved in the log file.
(1) Service Call Error (Classification: E)

Description:
An unrecoverable error that needs service person's measures.
Cause:
Hardware or firmware is faulty.
Measure:
If the device is not reset by turning it off once and turning it on again, replace
the hardware or firmware.
*Log example of hard disc error

"E E56E-0401"
(2) Operator Call (Classification: O)

Description:
An error that the operator can take measures.
Cause:
No paper, no toner or paper jams, which needs operator's help.
Measure:
Remove the cause to restore the device to its normal state.
*Log example of door open

"O DOOR2 open"
5-14
(3) Warning (Classification: W)

Description:
A warning state such as expiration of service life of consumables and data error
occurred.
Cause:
A consumable approaches its life, or any failure in the environment, settings, or

data occurred.
Measure:
Take appropriate measures to remove the cause.

(Service person may partially participate in the measure process.)
*Log example of comand warning

"W DATA 0201"
5-15
5.7
Error Log Classification List
Table 5-16 Error Log Classification List

Message
5-16
Classification
Description
Measure
E xxxxxxxx (Error)
Service call error
An unrecoverable error needs If the device is not recovered from

service person's measures.
this error after turning the power
off and on, hear from the user about
the situation when the error
occurred, and upgrade the firmware
to the latest version or replace a
relevant part accordingly.
O xxxxxxxx
(Operator Call)
Operator call
An error that the operator can T a k e m e a s u r e s a c c o r d i n g t o t h e

take measures.
guidance message displayed on the
Remove the cause to restore LCD.
the device to its normal state.
W xxxxxxxx
(Warning)
Warning
A consumable approaches its Remove the cause of failure.

life, or faulty in the
(The service person may partially
environment, settings, or data participate in the measure process.)
was detected.
5.8
Job Log
When the device executes a job (i.e. print), a job log is saved in the internal memory. Various
types of information, including execution time, are registered in this job log. You can review the
job log history from "PRINT JOB LOG" of the function menu.
(The job log information is saved even after the power was turned off.)
Total count and distance, both of which are updated whenever a new job is executed, are
registered in this job log as well.
5.8.1
Job Log Print Item

Table 5-17 Job Log Print Item
(1 / 2)
Header information
Print item
Log media
Type of log media (log storage position)

HDD : Hard disk drive
FLASH : Flash memory
Max log number
Number of registrable logs

HDD
: 65535
FLASH : 1023
Log size
Log size per information: 128 bytes
Log set count
Number of registered logs
Job information
Print item
Log file storage position (1 to 65535) (4 digits)
Log
Shows the job history number assigned to the job in execution order.
Job number (1 to 999) (3 digits)
Job
When the system recognizes the generation of job, the job number is assigned to the job.
Req
Job generation (spool) number (1 to 999) (3 digits)

Processing PDL (5 characters)
PDL
Port
A processing PDL is prepared for every data format

HPGL/TIFF/CALS/COPY/SCAN
Protocol / port number (4 characters)
Fxx (FTP), Lxx (LPR), Xxx (XPT), PARA, USB?
xx: Port number (1 to 10)
IP address (10 characters)
IP-address
When the protocol is USB and parallel jobs are executed, the IP address is not defined.
File name (12 characters)
File
Displays the file name that the host reported as printer job.
User name (12 characters)
User
Displays the user name that the host reported as printer job.
Receive data size (5 characters)
Input Size
This information shows the received data size (amount). Byte, kilobyte, and megabyte are
used as unit.
5-17
Table 5-17 Job Log Print Item

(2 / 2)
Job information
Print item
Number of print job (3 characters)
Output Page
This information shows the number of sheets printed in one job, regardless of
drawing size.
Number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper (3 characters)
Output Acc
This information shows the number of output sheets converted into A4/A3 paper
based on the value indicated by Output Page.
(A3/A4 = 1, A2 = 2, A1 = 3, A0 = 5)
Receive date
Date
This information shows the date in the format of xx (month) and xx (day). Only
figures are displayed.
Job start time (receive start time)
Job Start
This information shows the job execution start time in the format of xx (hour) xx
(minute) xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.)
In case of reprint or additional print, the start time of the new job is displayed
here.
Job end time
Job End
This information shows the print end time in the format of xx (hour) xx (minute)
xx (second). (The date (D/M/Y) is not displayed.)
Total counter (number of sheets converted into A4/A3 paper) (unit: 10 sheets)
Counter Acc*10
This counter shows the total number of printed sheets that will be updated
whenever a new job is executed. "1234" means 12340 sheets.
Total distance (unit: 10 m)
Counter Run*10
This counter shows the total print distance that will be updated whenever a new
job is executed. "1234" means 12340 meters.
Job execution result (status)
Result
5-18
This information shows the execution result of a job.

Only after the job is normally ended, the number in Counter Acc*10 is updated.
When a recovery process is executed, NORMAL is displayed as status and the
counter is ready.
NORMAL
: Normally terminated.
DELETE
: Data is discarded.
CANCEL
: Print (job) is canceled.
ERxxxx
: Error end. (xxxx: Error log storage position)
EXTRA
: Additional print
AGAIN
: Reprint
5.9
Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board)
After the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced, the following operations are
needed. Be sure to transfer the EEPROM from the old board to the new board. (except where the
EEPROM is faulty).
Procedures:
1 Enter the serial number of the device.
Access "DEVICE SERIAL NO." of the "SYSTEM" menu and enter the serial number of the
device. Also, perform the operation for the serial number unset. (See "5.10 Serial Number
Unset".)
2 Perform the install operations and set of IP address. (Refer to the user's guide.)
3 Reset the each setting value on the other PCB - ASSY - MRC2.
Note:
EEPROM contains important information such as counter. Pay close

attention not to break its legs or mount the element upside down during
removal and installation.
5-19
5.10
Serial Number Unset
After powering on, the device self-tests the area in which its serial number has been saved (flash
memory). If it is proved that the area is damaged or is not initialized, the following message
appears on the LCD.
The message appears when the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (main control board) is replaced with an
uninitialized board.
When this message appears, you must enter the maintenance person mode and enter the serial
number.
E
SET
Measure:
THE
S /N
Enter the device serial number using the following procedures.

E
SET
THE
S / N
P A S S WO R D
I N P U T MO D E

I NPUT
LEVEL
SER I A L
* 00000
3 Enter the serial number of the device.

4 Press the
5-20
key.
OK
003
N UMB E R
Chapter 6 Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)
Chapter 6
Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)
This chapter describes the troubleshooting if a failure occurs in the engine.

If a message as shown below is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, take a corrective
measure following an error code "nnnn" of the error message. For other troubles, take a
corrective measure according to the symptom.
E ENG I NE
nnnn
P OW E R
OF F / ON
Error code
6.1
How to Read This Manual
6.1.1
Overview of Engine Troubleshooting

When troubleshooting the engine, first perform the level-1 troubleshooting to classify the
trouble. Then, advance the troubleshooting by performing the level-2 troubleshooting.
When you try to find a cause of the trouble through the troubleshooting or on the check-chart,
read the procedure carefully to avoid a failure. Also, if multiple causes are supposed, it is difficult
to find all causes at a time, and therefore you may have to perform the troubleshooting of the
same title again. In such a case, even for the same troubleshooting, ongoing judgment may
change, thus requiring extreme care.
Level-1 troubleshooting
The level-1 troubleshooting is the first step of troubleshooting. The level-1 troubleshooting
clarifies whether an error code or other trouble symptom is present or not to provide a hint for
proceeding to the level-2 troubleshooting.
Level-2 troubleshooting
The level-2 troubleshooting provides the classified troubleshooting procedures according to the
error code, paper jam, and other various symptoms. As a trouble diagnostic method, a cause of
the trouble can be found in a short time by performing the procedure given by the troubleshooting
or on the check-chart.
6-1
Error code :
If an error code indicating an engine trouble is displayed on the

LCD, refer to the error description, resetting method, and corresponding troubleshooting item from the error code list to perform the troubleshooting.
Paper jam :
If a paper jam occurs frequently, refer to the description of the

paper jam code list to perform the paper jam troubleshooting.
Other symptoms :
If an error code is not displayed or any trouble other than paper

jam occurs, judge an engine block concerned from the symptom
to perform the troubleshooting.
Maintenance diagnostic mode

This device provides various self-diagnostic functions to check or test the condition of each part
of the engine. These self-diagnostic functions are executed during the level-2 troubleshooting in
the engine maintenance mode.
For each function and its operating procedure in the engine maintenance mode, see Section 2.
6.1.2
Terminology
The terms listed below are frequently used in the engine troubleshooting. Before performing the
trouble analysis, understand the meaning of these terms.
Common terms
6-2
Error code :
"nnnn" of an error message "E ENGINE nnnn" displayed on the

LCD of the control panel if the engine finds a trouble is called
the error code.
Visual check :
Check visually the operation of parts such as a relay and mechanical linkage to find any faulty.
Enter maintenance
Enter the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.1.1). Then,
code 03:
select the maintenance code <03> and press the
Turn on power :
Turn on the Power switch.
Turn off power :
Turn off the Power switch.
Check for a short :
Turn off the Power switch. Measure resistance between pin and
frame in the ohm range of the tester.
key.
Select a subcode :
Enter the engine maintenance mode following the procedure

given in "2.1.1 How to Enter the Engine Maintenance Mode,"
and select the maintenance code <03>. Then, select a subcode
"nn" and press the
key.
"On" display ("Off" display) : This means that the maintenance code <06> is activated and a
subcode is selected, and then the signal level inputted to the
LCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) is displayed on the
LCD. "On" or "Off" is displayed.
Exit from trouble analysis procedure
Mechanical trouble :
This term is used when you shift to mechanical adjustment or

part replacement. Read all items (main causes are described) for
comparison with a symptom appearing in the machine to find a
cause of the trouble.
Replace one after another : If a trouble is no longer analyzed, this device uses a method in
which a part is replaced one after another. The parts to be replaced are listed in the order having high replacement frequency
and high probability of trouble.
6-3
6.2
Leve-1 Troubleshooting
The level-1 troubleshooting sorts the troubles.

If "E ENGINE nnnn" is displayed on the LCD of the control panel, perform the troubleshooting
following this unrecoverable error code (see Section 6.3.1).
If a paper jam occurs frequently, enter the engine maintenance mode to check the paper jam
situations and perform the troubleshooting (see Section 6.3.2).
For other cases, make judgment from the symptom and perform the troubleshooting (see
Section 6.3.3).
6.2.1
Unrecoverable Error Codes and Description

(1 / 2)
Unrecoverable
error codes
2020
2021, 2022
2023
2024, 202A
6-4
Description
BM01 (waster toner bottle vibrating motor) trouble
HM01 (heat roller pulse motor) trouble
PM01 (process motor) trouble
GM01 (developer pulse motor) trouble
2026, 202B
TM01 (paper feed pulse motor) trouble
2027, 202C
2028, 202D
2029, 202E
2030
Power supply failure (50 Hz/60 Hz evaluation value is faulty)
2032
High voltage power supply failure (overload occurred in high voltage output)
2033
Power supply failure (interrupt does not occur when the power is turned off)
2035
LED head correction data transfer error (time out)
2036
LED head correction data transfer error (header error)
2037
LED head correction data transfer error (footer error)
2081
TH02 (over thermistor) detected overheat of fuser temperature
2082
TH01 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure

Extremely high temperature (cables could be shorted)
2083
2084
2085
TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be
shorted) or extremely low temp (cables could be disconnected)
2086
TH03 (LED head temperature measuring thermistor) exceeded the LED head upper limit temp
2087
TH04 (fixation temperature control thermistor) failure. Extremely high temp (cables could be shorted)
2088
2089

(2 / 2)
Unrecoverable
error codes
20C1 to 20C3
Description
NVRAM checksum error (system parameter)
20C4
NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part replacement)
20C5
NVRAM checksum error (print distance after part cleaning)
20C6
NVRAM checksum error (user-defined engine parameter)
20C8
NVRAM checksum error (unrecoverable error log)
20C9
NVRAM checksum error (paper jam error log)
20CA
NVRAM checksum error (process cartridge consumption log)
20D1 to 20D8
NVRAM checksum error (engine control parameter)
20E0
WDT (watchdog timer) overflow
2D01
NAK was transmitted to the controller 7 times but no command is returned
2D02
Response to the controller was made 7 times but ACK is not returned
2D03
When receiving data from controller, the line error was detected more than 100 times
2D04
Engine status transition was noticed to the controller 7 times but ACK is not returned
2F7C
After F/W rewriting error occurred, the flash memory cannot be cleared (F/W cannot be restored)
2F7D
After F/W rewriting error occurred, no data can be written in the flash memory (F/W cannot be
restored)
2F7E
After F/W rewriting error occurred, checksum of F/W rewritten in the flash memory does not match
(F/W cannot be restored)
2F7F
After F/W rewriting error occurred, F/W rewritten in the flash memory does not match the contents
of SRAM (F/W cannot be restored)
6-5
6.2.2
Paper Jam Error Codes and Description

Table 6-2 Lists of Paper Jam Error Codes
Paper jam error

codes
3330
3331
3332
3400
3401, 3402
3403, 3404
3491, 3492
When paper roll is rewound, arrival at PS04 is too early
3493, 3494
When paper roll is rewound, paper exists in PS04 though preset paper pass time passed
3500
Paper is located at PS04 (register) position
3501, 3502
3503, 3504
3591, 3592
3593, 3594
Paper trail edge does not leave PS05 though preset paper pass time passed
3600
Paper is located in PS04 (suction) position
3601, 3602
3603, 3604
3691, 3692
3693, 3694
3700
3701, 3702
Paper is located at PS07 (fuser) position

3703, 3704
3791, 3792
3793, 3794
3042 to 3047
6-6
Description
Trouble when cutter blade moves
6.3
Leve-2 Troubleshooting
6.3.1
"Unrecoverable error code" Troubleshooting
(1) "2020" troubleshooting

This trouble occurs if the BM01 motor does not rotate.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (09) that corresponds to the displayed
error code to turn on the motor.
Is the motor rotating?
Y
N
Is +24VDC present between CN7-1 and CN7-5 of PCB-ASSY-MEC?
Y
N
Check CBL07 for a disconnection or short.
Check low voltage power unit.
Check if the load on mechanical system is large.
Check CBL03B and CBL032 for a short.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
(2) "2021" / "2022" / "2024" / "202A" troubleshooting

These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.
First, check if the interlock switches (INT1 and INT3) are normal.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (07 to 08) that corresponds to the
displayed error code to turn on the motor.
Y
N
Y
N
HM trouble
Check CBL05A and CBL051 for a short.
GM trouble
Check CBL05A, CBL51 and CBL052 for a short.
6-7

These troubles occur if the PM01 motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (06) that corresponds to the displayed
error code to turn on the motor.
Y
N
Y
N
Check CBL06A and CBL061 for a short or open circuit.
If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
Mechanical system check
Check the clutch for operation.
Check the gear for damage or galling.
If not so, replace the motor or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
6-8
(4) "2026" / "202B" / "2027" / "202C" "2028" / "202D" / "2029" / "202E" troubleshooting
These troubles occur if the motor does not rotate or the motor rotation speed varies.
Enter the engine maintenance mode 08. Select the motor subcode (10 to13) that corresponds to the
displayed error code to turn on the motor.
Y
N
Is +24VDC present between CN21-1 and CN21-2 of PCB-ASSY-RFU
(motor driver bord)?
Y
N
Check CBL07 and CBL 071 for a disconnection or short.
Are other motors rotating?
Y
N
Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit.
Check CBL06B and CBL062 for a short or open circuit.
- TM trouble
Check CBL22 for a short or open circuit.
- FM01 trouble
Check CBL23 and CBLR231 for a short or open circuit.
- FM02 trouble
- FM03 trouble
Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board)
Mechanical system check
Check the clutch for operation.
Check the gear for damage or galling.
6-9

Input of frequency counter pulses from the power supply is faulty.
Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit.
If not so, replace the low voltage power unit or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).

Either of CH1 to CH4 of high voltage outputs is shorted.
Turn on the CH1 to CH4 one by one to check if the discharge sound is heard or the monitor
output of high voltage power is stable so as to identify which channel is shorted.
For a monitoring method of high voltage power unit, see 9.1.
Enter the maintenance code 09 in the engine maintenance mode. Select a subcode that corresponds to
each process.
CH1 failure (subcode 01)
Check the process cartridge (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials,
or slack. Check the grid for dirtiness or slack.)
Check the CBL-HV1 for a short.
If so, replace respective parts.
Check the developer (Check the developer bias contact for a touch.)
Check the CBL-HV22, CBL-HV2, CBL-HV21 for a short.
Check the transfer unit (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or
slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.)
Check the separator (Check the wire for dirtiness, presence of foreign materials, or
slack. Check the transfer separator for a mounting state.)
If all channels are faulty
Check CBL09B for a short or open circuit.
6-10

The running distance data may not be saved in the NVRAM on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board) when the plotter was turned off in the previous job. Possible causes of this error will be low
voltage power unit, faulty PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board), or faulty CBL09.
Turn off the plotter once, and after several seconds, turn it on again.
Does 2033 error occur?
Y
N
Check if the running distance is correct, and if OK, the plotter is normal.
NG, go to the next step.
Referring to Appendix A.2.1 (4), check the LED indication on the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board) when the power is turned off.
Are LED 4 to 8 on PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) turned on?
Y
N
Replace lower voltage power unit.
Check the CBL09 for a short or open circuit.
Check the 5 V of PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
(8) "2035" / "2036" / "2037" troubleshooting

These troubles will occur when the "config" (writing of correction data) for the LED head was not
executed normally.
Is +5VDC present between CN4 (CN5)-1 and CN4 (CN5)-4 of LED head?
Y
N
Check the CBL13 and CBL121 for a disconnection or short.
Check the low voltage power supply.
If not so, replace the LED head.
Check the CBL08
If not so, replace the LED head or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
6-11

Check the TH01 (fuser control thermistor) for a mounting state (such as disconnected connector,
remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01).
Check the TH01 contact surface with the heat roller for dirtiness. Clean as necessary.
Check the TH01 for an open circuit.
If so, replace the TH01.
Check the CBL45 and CBL04B for a short.
Check the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is less
than 1k .
Check the CBL04B and CBL045 for a short.
If the trouble is not removed, replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
(10) "2082" / "2087" troubleshooting

Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of
thermistor is less than 1k .

Check respective fans for operation one by one.
Check the BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation.
Does each fan operate normally?
Y
N
Replace faulty fan.
Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) for a short.
Check the TH01 and TH04.
If so, replace TH01 or TH04.
Check the CBL04B and CBL045.
Check the ozone filter for clogging.
If clogged, replace the ozone filter.
Note:
6-12
Check that the halogen lamp turns on and off repeatedly at a several
second interval.

Check if the halogen lamp (fuser lamp) turns on.
WARNING
-
Before checking the halogen lamp on/off operation, make sure that fuser unit
temperature has dropped sufficiently.
Note:
After the halogen lamp was checked for its lighting, immediately turn off the
halogen lamp (turn off the power switch or open the cover).
Does the halogen lamp turn on?

Y
N
Check the THM (thermal fuse) for continuity.
Is the fuse continuous?
Y
N
Replace the Thermal Fuse Assy.
*After the fuse was replaced, execute again "2084" troubleshooting.
Check the FL01 and FL02 (lamp) for continuity.
Is the lamp continuous?
Y
N
Replace the halogen lamp which is not continuous.
Check the CBL17, CBL171 and CBL- HTR for an open circuit.
If the trouble is not removed, replace the low voltage current or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine
control board).
Check the TH01 and TH04 (fuser control thermistor) and the TH02 (overheat thermistor) for a
mounting state (such as disconnected connector, remaining paper chips, floating and bent TH01,
TH02, or TH04).
Check the contact surface of TH01, TH02, and TH04 with the heat roller for dirtiness.
Clean as necessary.
Check the TH01, TH02 and TH04 for a short or open circuit.
If so, replace TH01, TH02 and TH04.
6-13

Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short (trouble if resistance value of thermistor is
less than 1k.
If so, replace the LED head.

Check respective fans for operation one by one.
Check the BL01 (suction fan) BL02 (fuser fan) and BL06 (fuser A3 fan) for operation.
Does each fan operate normally?
Y
N
Replace faulty fan.
Check the TH03 (LED head thermistor) for a short.
Check the TH03.
If so, replace the LED head.
Check the ozone filter for clogging.
If clogged, replace the ozone filter.
(15) "20C1 to 20CA" / "20D1 to 20D8" / "20E0" troubleshooting

(16) "2D01 to 2D04" troubleshooting

Check the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (controller board).
If so, replace the PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (engine control board).
(17) "2F7C to 2F7F" troubleshooting

6-14
6.3.2
"Paper jam error code" Troubleshooting
(1) Power ON jam checkout procedure

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble for which a paper jam error message is
displayed on the LCD before printing.
Note:
When two or more doors are displayed on the LCD, check the sensors that
correspond to all doors.
Example:
If the specified door is one
OP E N DOOR X
R EMO V E P A P E R
If the specified doors are two or more

O P E N DOOR X , X
R E MO V E P A P E R
1 Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode, and check corresponding
sensors listed below from respective subcodes for each target door involved in paper jam.
Paper jam
target door
"Door 1" or
"Door 2" or
"Door 3"
"Door 4" or
"Door 5"
Maintenance
code
Sensor
Items to be checked
PS30
(A0 paper size sensor)
- Light enters the sensor.

- CBL28-PS30 short (GND)
- CBL28-PS30 loose connector or disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
PS31
(A1 paper jam4 sensor)

- Sensor failure
PS32
(A2 paper size sensor)

- Sensor failure
PS04
(paper size sensor)

- Sensor failure
PS05
(paper registration
sensor)

- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 short (GND)
- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL044-PS05 loose connector or
disconnection (open)
- Sensor failure
PS06
(suction jam sensor)

- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 short (GND)
- CBL04A-CBL041-CBL043-PS06 loose connector or
- Sensor failure
PS07
(fuser jam sensor)

- CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) short (GND)
- CBL04B-CBL045-CBL (PS07) loose connector or
- Sensor failure
"Door 6"
6-15
2 Replace the sensor, and when the sensor is kept on even if each sensor code is entered, replace
the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board).
The sensor itself goes low when the light is intercepted.
(2) "Frequent paper jam" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to guide which paper jam troubleshooting is to be executed
according to the paper jam situations.
Note:
Turn off the power switch and check that no paper remains in the machine.
Turn on the power switch. Is the paper jam door displayed on LCD?
Y
N
Perform the "frequent paper jam" troubleshooting.
Enter the maintenance code 05 in the engine maintenance mode. Check the last ten jam
codes displayed on the LCD. At this time, perform the troubleshooting one by one, starting
from the code that occurred most frequently.
Jam code
"3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting
Jam code
"3401" / "3402"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3403" / "3404"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3491" / "3492"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3493" / "3494"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3501" / "3502"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3503" / "3504"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3591" / "3592"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3593" / "3594"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3601" / "3602"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3603" / "3604"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3691" / "3692"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3693" / "3694"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3701" / "3702"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3703" / "3704"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3791" / "3792"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3793" / "3794"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"37A1" / "37A2"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3801" / "3802"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3803" / "3804"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3891" / "3892"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3893" / "3894"
troubleshooting
Jam code
"3805" / "3806"
troubleshooting
Perform the "Power ON jam checkout procedure."
6-16
(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" / troubleshooting

Check if paper chips or foreign materials remain in the cutter unit.
Check if wrong type of paper is used.
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 17 or 18 to sense
RE01 or RE02 (cutter left or right home position switch).
Is the ON OFF display changed?
Y
N
Check the CBL27 and CBL62 for a short or open circuit.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine
control board), next, replace the cutter unit (RE01, RE02 faulty) in the following order.
Check the cutter blade stop position relative to the RE01 and RE02.
If the position is inadequate, replace the cutter unit.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board) or PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control
board).
(4) Jam code "3401" / "3402" troubleshooting

Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early after start.
Check the paper or paper flange for setting.
Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.
Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).
In case of a cutting failure, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047" troubleshooting" to
check the cutter home position and cutter motion.
Is PS04 mounted correctly? (PS04 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y
N
If so, replace the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4).
Check the paper path up to the PS04.
6-17

Roll 1, Roll 2, or Roll 3 paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too lately after start.
Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remains in the PS04.
Check the leading edge of paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 04 to sense PS04
(paper jam sensor 4).
Y
N
Check the PS04 for setting failure or faulty lever shape.
If not so, replace the PS04.
Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors).
Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?)
Y
N
Execute "2021" troubleshooting fi see Section 6.3.1 (2)
Check the pinch roller for pressure.

At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too early.
Y
N
If so, replace the PS04.
Check the paper path from PS04 up to PS05 (paper registration sensor).
6-18

At the paper rewinding, the top edge of paper reached the PS04 (paper jam sensor 4) too slow.
Check the paper for setting or if paper chips remain in the PS04.
(paper jam sensor 4).
Y
N
Check the CBL28 for short.
Select the code "121" to rotate clockwise the FM01, FM02, and FM03 (main motors).
Do the FM01, FM02, and FM03 rotate clockwise? (Do the chains move clockwise?)
Y
N
Execute 2021 troubleshooting see Section 6.3.1 (2)

The top edge of paper reached to the PS05 (registration sensor) too early.
Check the leading edge of the paper for a cutting failure (dog ear, corrugation, etc.).
Check the paper feed roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.
Y
N
6-19

The top edge of paper reached the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow.
Y
N
Check the CBL04,CBL041 and CBL044 for a short.
If the trouble is not removed, replace the PS05.
Check the paper path up to the PS04 from PS05.
When the jammed paper remains in the cutter, execute "(3) "3042" / "3045" / "3046" / "3047"
troubleshooting" to check the cutter home position and cutter motion.

The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too early.
Check the registration roller surfaces for dirtiness or presence of foreign materials.
Y
N
Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?)
Y
N
Check the paper feed for load.
Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor).
6-20

The bottom edge of paper passed the PS05 (paper registration sensor) too slow.
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 05, Check the PS05.
Y
N
Check the CBL04A, CBL041 and CBL044 for a short.
Check the operation for CL04 (clutch (registration))
Check the paper pass for over PS05.
Check the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control board) Motor FG signal does not come Paper
cut length becomes long.

The paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early.
Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y
N
Check the CL04 (registration clutch) for operation and for ON/OFF synchronization with the
registration roller.
If so, check the LC04 for a mounting clearance.
6-21

The top edge of paper reached the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow.
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 06, sense to PS06.
Y
N
If so, persists, replace the PS06.
A mechanical trouble has occurred. Check the paper path.
Check the paper for running condition and shape of leading edge.
Check the belts for elongation.
Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding.
Check if the paper floats up by getting stuck to the separating finger (OPC).
Check if the paper is separated from the drum correctly.
Check the BL01 for operation.
Check the ozone filter (for lifetime).
The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too early.
Is PS06 mounted and shape correctly? (PS06 setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y
N
Check the paper for running condition or for floating up by wrinkle or slack.
Check the paper for floating up due to a paper separation failure from the drum.
Check if the paper floats up by air bleeding.
Check the ozone filter (for lifetime).
Measure the paper length (Is the cut length short?)

Y
N
Check the paper feed for load.

Check the motor TM01 (try to replace the motor).
6-22

The bottom edge of paper passed the PS06 (suction jam sensor) too slow.
Y
N
Check the paper pass to PS07.
Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding.

Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets).
Check the BL01 for operation (A4 size).
Check the ozone filter (A4 size).
Check the air bleeding (A4 size).

The bottom paper passed the PS07 (suction jam sensor) too early.
Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y
N
Check the paper path.
Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light.
Check the fuser drive mechanism (for looseness of gears and sprockets).
6-23

The top edge of paper reached the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow.
Y
N
Check the CBL04A, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short.
Check if the paper feed fault by air bleeding.

Check the fuser drive mechanism.
Check the paper for deformation by getting stuck to the separation finger (fuser, IN).
Check if the paper is separated from the heat roller correctly.
Check the ozone filter.

The bottom paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too early.
Is PS07 mounted and shape correctly? (PS07setting failure, faulty lever, etc.)
Y
N
Check the PS07 for malfunction due to external light.
Check the fuser drive mechanism.
Check the paper path.
(Check the paper guide in the vicinity of PS07 for shape, curve, or warp (clearance of path).
6-24

The bottom edge of paper passed the PS07 (fuser jam sensor) too slow.
Y
N
Check the CBL04B, CBL045 and CBL(PS07) for a short.
6-25
6.3.3
Troubleshooting by symptom
(1) "Door open check" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a "Door open check" is displayed on the
LCD of the control panel and the print is disabled though the doors and covers are closed.
Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 to 4 displayed on the LCD.
1 Troubleshooting of "CLOSE DOOR 5" display
CAUTION
-
If INT3 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization
that returns the cutter to the home position. To avoid this, never touch the
INT3.
Open the cutter door (Door 5). The INT3 (cutter door interlock switch) turns on.
Does "CLOSE DOOR 5" display disappear?
Y
6-26
N
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 21.
Is "On" displayed?
Y
N
Check the INT 3.
Contacts in signal system of INT3 may be faulty.
CBL03A, CBL031, or CBL14 may be disconnected or connected loosely.
Check the INT 3 for its mounting state.

Check the actuator for a breakage or bending.
Check mechanical parts.

Note:
Execute the troubleshooting of 4 first.
CAUTION
-
If PS21 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization.
To avoid this, never touch the PS21.
Check the PS21.

Contacts in signal system of PS21 may be faulty, or PS21 itself may be faulty.
CBL23, CBLR231, or ROLL1CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).
CAUTION
-
If PS22 turns on and the plotter is normal, the plotter executes the initialization.
To avoid this, never touch the PS22.
Check the PS22.

Contacts in signal system of PS22 may be faulty, or PS22 itself may be faulty.
CBL24, CBLR241, or ROLL2CN connector may be disconnected or connected loosely.
If not so, replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor driver board).
6-27
(2) "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the toner refilling is
displayed and the print is disabled though the toner was refilled.
Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1 and 2 displayed on the LCD.
1 Troubleshooting of "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display

Set the toner cartridge and pull the lever to the right.
Does "SET CARTRIDGE & PULL LEVER TO RIGHT" display on LCD disappear?
Y
N
Is the "ON " displayed ?
Y
N
Check the MS04 (toner door open-close switch).
Contacts of MS04 may be faulty.
Check the MS04 for its mounting state.

Check the toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.
Check if the toner cartridge is set correctly.
6-28
2 Troubleshooting of "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" display

Push the lock of the lever with your finger to unlock, and pull the lever to the right.
Check the hopper of developer for toner remaining quantity.
Does the toner remain sufficiently (agitator shaft is not visible)?
Y
N
Return the lever to the left.
Refill the toner.
Is "REPLACE TONER CARTRIDGE" displayed again after one minute?

Y
N
Is the "ON " displayed ?
Y
N
Check the TS01 (toner remaining quantity sensor).
Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard) or developer.
Check the toner cartridge for its expiration date.

Check if the toner was set after adequate agitation.
Replace the PCB-ASSY-MEC (engine control bard).
6-29
(3) "Replace waste toner cartridge" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the waste toner
cartridge replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the cartridge was replaced.
Perform the troubleshooting that corresponds to the following 1, 2 displayed on LCD of the
control panel.
1 Troubleshooting of "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display
Set the waste toner cartridge.
Does "SET WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear?
Y
N
Is "On" displayed?
Y
N
Check the MS05 (waste toner cartridge detection switch).
Contact fault of MS05.
Check the CBL03A, CBL031, or MS05 ASSY disconnected .

Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.
Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly.
2 Troubleshooting of "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display

Set the new waste toner cartridge.
Does "CHANGE WASTE CARTRIDGE" display on LCD disappear?
Y
N
Is "On" displayed?
Y
N
Check the MS05 (waste toner sensor).
(Check the TS02 by applying a magnetic screwdriver or steel plate such as a
metallic ruler, and full waste toner cartridge to the TS02.)
Check the TS02 and the cartridge for clearance.
Check the CBL03A, CBL031, and CBL035 for a short, loose connection, or
disconnection.
6-30

Check the waste toner cartridge for deformation or any fault.
Check if the waste toner cartridge is set correctly.
(4) "Replace paper" troubleshooting

This troubleshooting is used to analyze a trouble when a message concerning the paper
replacement is displayed and the print is disabled though the paper was replaced.
Perform the following troubleshooting according to the display on LCD of the control panel.
Troubleshooting of "SET PAPER" display
Set the paper roll attached with the paper flange.
Does "SET PAPER" display on LCD disappear?
Y
N
Enter the maintenance code 06 in the engine maintenance mode. Select subcode 08, 09
and 10.
Is "On" displayed?
Y
N
Check the PS11 (Roll 1 sensor) or PS12 (Roll 2 sensor).
Contacts in signal system of PS11 or PS12 may be faulty, or PS itself may be
faulty.
Check the CBL23, CBLR231, CBL24, CBLR241, CBL25 and CBLR251
for a short.
Check the PS11 or PS12 for its mounting position.
Check the flange guide for its mounting position.
Check the PS11 and PS12 for its mounting state.

Check the flange guide for its mounting position.
Check the paper flange for deformation or any fault.
Check if the paper flange is set correctly.
Replace the PCB-ASSY-RFU (motor drive board).
6-31
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)
Chapter 7
Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)
This chapter describes the type of print quality troubles and its corrective measures.
7.1
Print Quality Troubleshooting Method
If a print quality trouble occurs, print an engine test pattern saved in the memory inside the
engine to check if there is a failure at the engine side (hereinafter a printing of this engine test
pattern is called the engine test print).
The print quality troubleshooting method is classified into the following two depending on the
contents of failure.
-
For the failures in the plotting length accuracy or registration, measure the printed engine
test pattern at the position shown in "7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting
Specification Failure" to judge whether the measured value satisfies the reference value.
For the failures in the background or print density, check doubtful parts from the symptom
to take a corrective measure. See "7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality
Failure."
7-1
7.1.1
Type of Engine Test Patterns
To output engine test patterns, enter maintenance code 10 in the engine maintenance mode,
select the appropriate subcode, and execute the engine test print. For procedures on how to print
test patterns, see Section 2.3.10.
Table 7-1 shows the relationship between subcodes and engine test patterns.
Table 7-1 Engine Test Pattern List
Subcode
Engine test pattern
Evaluation item
01
Pattern 1 Vertical zebra (thick vertical stripes)
- Ghost
02
Pattern 2 Checkerboard
- Print density / base paper soiling
03
Pattern 3
04
Pattern 4 1 by 3 horizontal
05
06
07
Pattern 7 1-dot line, 64-dot square mesh
08
Pattern 8 1-dot mes
09
Pattern 9 2-dot mesh
10
Pattern 10 4-dot mesh
- Reproducibility of thin lines

- Measurement and adjustment of print length
- Measurement and adjustment of registration
- Continuous printing
11
Pattern 11 2 by 2 vertical, 2-dot shift
- Inuniform LED illumination
12
Pattern 12 black / white + Mesh
- Image density / base paper soiling / line

width measurement
13
Pattern 13 Mesh + scale
14
Pattern 14 Mesh + slant line,1-dot
15
Pattern 15 Mesh + slant line, 2-dot
16
Pattern 16
17
Pattern 17 Solid black
18
Pattern 18 Solid white
19
Pattern 19 1 by 3 vertica
20
Pattern 20 2 by 2 vertical
Horizontal zebra (thick horizontal

stripes)
Mesh + slant line, (1 and 2 dots

mixed)
- Ghost
- Jitter
- Nonuniform LED illumination
- Skip/smear
- Formation of toner layer on the magnet
roller
- Resolution
- Image uniformity
- Adjustment of LED head joint
- Adjustment of fixation position
- Cut length accuracy / cut squareness

- Plotting length accuracy / plotting
squareness
- Measurement and adjustment of registration
- Skew
- Reproducibility of thin lines
- Continuous printing
- Image uniformity
- Adjustment of fixing roller nip pressure
- Nonuniform LED illumination
Engine test pattern image outputs are shown on the next page.
Note:
Test patterns on the next page are only example showing what patterns will
be output. Pattern sizes and intervals are different from those actually output.
Test patterns 4, 5, 6, 7, 11, and 17 are represented in solid black. But, they
have different images in actual output.
Test patterns 8, 9, and 10 are actually different with respect to line thickness.
Test patterns 14, 15, and 16 are actually different with respect to line
thickness and pattern combination.
Test patterns 18, or solid white pattern, is omitted in this example.
7-2
Pattern 1
Pattern 2
Pattern 3
Pattern 4
Pattern 5
Pattern 6
Pattern 7
Pattern 11
Pattern 17
Pattern 8
Pattern 12
Pattern 9
Pattern 10
Pattern 13
Pattern 14
Pattern 15
Pattern 16
7-3
7.2
Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure
7.2.1
Plotting Specification and Measuring Method

Note:
No.
1
To check registrations (top edge and side), always print the appropriate test
patterns. Also, replace the normal paper and the tracing paper and execute the
engine test print. Sizes and intervals are different from those actually output.
Item
Accuracy of
plotting length
Measurement position
Standard
Main scan direction : Measure the horizontal H that

is composed of 74 blocks.
Sub scan direction
: Measure the vertical dimension
V that is composed of 104 blocks.
Remarks
- Main scan direction:

Engine test pattern 15
8020.5 % (4 mm)
- Sub scan direction:
1127.10.5 % (5.6 mm)
* Output three sheets in succession and measure the third

sheet.
* Wait for about 15 minutes after the printout, and
measure the test sheet.
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
2
Plotting
squareness
Measure the horizontal dimension H composed of 74

- 0.2%
blocks, vertical dimension B composed of 74 blocks, and
diagonal dimension C to calculate the squareness using the
following equation.
{ (C -
H2 + B 2 )
H2+B2 }
Engine test pattern 15
100
* Output three sheets in succession and measure the third

sheet.
measure the test pattern.
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
2 block
2 block
Paper output direction
C
V
7-4
No.
3
Item
Top edge
registration
Access the K'th block counted from the right edge,
and measure V that is the vertical dimension of the
two frontmost blocks.
* Output three sheets in succession and measure the
third sheet.
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
* A1 vertical direction: K = 27 blocks.
A2 vertical direction: K = 20 blocks.
A3 vertical direction: K = 15 blocks.
A4 horizontal direction: K = 15 blocks.
Center
registration
Access the second block counted from the top edge,

and measure H1 that is the horizontal dimension of
the two rightmost blocks.
third sheet.
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
Skew
Access the L'th block counted from the top edge, and
measure H2 that is the horizontal dimension of the
two rightmost blocks. Subtract H2 from H1 to get
skew.
* A0 vertical direction: L = 104 blocks.
A1 vertical direction: L = 74 blocks.
A4 horizontal direction: L = 22 blocks.
2 block
K
H1
Standard
Remarks
- A1 vertical direction:
21.73.0 mm
21.73.0 mm
21.73.0 mm
- A4 horizontal direction:
21.73.0 mm
- Engine test pattern 15
21.73.0 mm
21.73.0 mm
21.73.0 mm
21.73.0 mm
5.6 mm
4 mm
2.7 mm
1.8 mm
1.2 mm
H2
7-5
No.
6
Item
Cut length accuracy Measure L, which is the overall length from top to
bottom edge, at the rightmost position.
third sheet.
Cut squareness
Measure V1 (right edge) and V2 (left edge) at the

second block counted from the top edge. Subtract V2
from V1.
third sheet.
* 1 block = 10.837 mm
Standard
Remarks
11896.0 mm
8414.0 mm
5943.0 mm
4203.0 mm
- A4 horizontal
direction: 2103.0 mm
3.0/841 mm
2.0/594 mm
1.4/420 mm
1.0/297 mm
1.0/297 mm
V1
V2
7.2.2
Corrective Measure in Case of Plotting Specification Failure

The parameters that do not meet the required standards must be corrected referencing to the
appropriate procedures specified in Section 9.4 "Correction of Plotting Parameter."
7-6
7.3
Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure
Table 7-2 lists the image quality defects to be corrected. Troubleshooting procedures for
respective items are described in the following paragraphs.
Table 7-2 Image Quality Defects List
Description
Item
(1) Fog
All or part of image is fogged.
(2) Uneven image density
The image density is not uniform in the same print.
(3) Fluctuation of image density
The image density is instable among prints.
among prints
(4) Low image density
The image density is low.
(5) Lacking (partial)
A part of the image is lost.
(6) Poor image reproduction
When the pattern is reproduced, the defect such as lacking is generated.
(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak)
The image is lost in the form of horizontal streak.
(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak)
The image is lost in the form of vertical streak.
(9) Black stripe on print
Black stripes are printed on the paper partially or entirely.
(10) Black stripe (horizontal)
Several black horizontal stripes are printed on the paper.
(11) Black stripe (vertical)
Several black vertical stripes are printed on the paper.
(12) Black banding (vertical)
Black bands are printed on the paper.
(13) Black spot
Black spots are generated.
(14) Unfixed toner
When the image is rubbed, the toner is separated from the paper.
(15) Registration defect
The printed image is shifted vertically or horizontally.
(16) Image slanting
The image is printed slantingly.
(17) Blank copy
No image is printed on the paper.
(18) Image overlap
The same image is printed in duplicate.
(19) Skip
The section that should be reproduced horizontally is not generated.
(20) Smear
Duplicated or smeary image is generated.
(21) Solid
The paper is printed in complete black instead of image.
7-7
(1) Fog
Print sample
Trouble symptom and check method

The image is fogged entirely or partially.
Print engine test patterns. The background is fogged.
Cause
Measure
1.
The developer blade suffers from poor charging
performance for reason(s) shown below.
The blade is worn/damaged.
The magnet roller surface is soiled/damaged.
The DV spacers on both sides of the magnet roller
are worn/damaged, or contact surfaces on both ends
of the drum are damaged/worn.
The DV spacers are faulty.
The drum surface that contacts the DV spacers is faulty.
Take the following action(s) depending on the cause

identified.
Clean or replace the blade.
Clean or replace the magnet roller.
Check the magnet roller surface and, if damaged,
replace the roller.
2.
The contact spring of the developer unit is in imperfect 2.

contact.
Check the contact spring of the developer unit. Replace

the spring if necessary.
3.
The charge unit is being discharged by itself or to other 3.

parts/materials.
Check the operating condition of the charge unit. (Turn

on the charge unit , maintenance code <08> "01") Replace
the unit if necessary.
4.
4.
The drum is soiled or degraded.
The drum is photodegraded (the drum is exposed to the
lighting system and the like).
Replace the process cartridge.

When the process cartridge was exposed to fluorescent
lamps for 10 minutes, leave it in the dark place for
about 12 hours to restore the optical performance.
1.
7-8
Replace the spacers if damaged.
Cause
Measure
5. The charge elimination LED suffers from imperfect 5. Check the charge elimination LED for turn-on.
lighting or soiling.
(maintenance <08> "05")
Clean the LED.
6. Unspecified toner is used.
6. Instruct the user to use only the specified toner. Clean the
entire developer unit.
7. The output of the charge unit is high or low.

The charge unit is imbalanced between left and right.
7. Measure the current on the charge unit monitor terminal

CH1 of the high-voltage power unit. See Section 9.1.1.
Check the charge unit roller 1 for wear, damage, and
soiling. Replace it if necessary.
8. The bias output of the developer unit is high or low.
8. Adjust the developer unit bias. See Sections 9.1.2 and

9.1.3.
Check CBL22 of the developer unit bias for connection.
9. The separator is not discharging the electricity.
9. Check the data accessed with the code <08> "04."

Adjust the separation unit bias. See Section 9.1.5.
10. The toner is fed too much.

10. Replace the magnet roller, as well as DV spacers at both
The space between drum and roll becomes short due to
ends of the roller.
worn DV spacers.
7-9
(2) Uneven image density

Print sample

Print engine test patterns.
The density and line thickness are nonuniform on a place-byplace basis.
Cause
Measure
1.
The bias output of the developer unit is low or the contact 2.

spring is in imperfect contact.
Check the bias output of the developer unit.

(maintenance <09> "02")
Check the contact spring for contact condition.
2.
The developer blade is worn entirely or partially.
3.
When the blade has been used to output more than

80000 sheets, replace it.
When the blade is remarkably worn, replace it.
3.
The LED head and lens are soiled.
4.
Clean the LED head and lens.
4.
5.
5.
The magnet roller is worn.
6.
Replace the magnet roller.
6.
The photosensitive drum is not grounded completely.
7.
Check the drum for grounding.

Check the frame leaf spring.
Check the installation condition of the process
cartridge.
7.
The toner is not fed uniformly due to worn magnet roller. 8.
Check the toner formation on the magnet roller. If the

thickness of the toner layer is substantially fluctuating,
replace the roller.
8.
The luminous strobe width of the LED head is

improperly set.
9.
Check the maintenance code <12> "731" to "733" data.

Check the luminous energy indicated on the LED head
to verify the luminous strobe width can generate the
energy. If the strobe width is not properly set, adjust it.
See Section 9.3.
If the trouble is not removed, enter the strobe width
larger than the setting to recheck the machine condition.
9.
The remaining toner is short.
10. Check the toner amount sensor (TS01) and refill the toner.
10. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the 11. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller.
developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.
7-10
(3) Fluctuation of image density among prints

Print sample

When the same test pattern is continuously printed on several
sheets, the image density is different among those printouts.
Cause
Measure
1.
1.
2.
The bias output of the developer unit is incorrect.
Check the bias output of the developer unit.

(maitenancecode 09<02>) Adjust the bias output
according to the result. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.
Check the contact spring for contact condition.
3.
The toner is short due to worn magnet roller. (This trouble 3.

is prone to occur at high print rate.)
Check the toner formation on the magnet roller. If the

toner layer is thin or the layer is not formed, replace the
roller.
4.
The electrification capacity of the toner is decreased due 4.

to worn or damaged magnet roller. (This trouble is prone
to occur at high print rate.)
Check the blade. Clean or replace the blade. (If the number
of output sheets has exceeded the value defined as blade
service life, replace the blade.)
5.
Unspecified toner is used.
Instruct the user. Clean the entire developer unit.
5.
Clean or replace the process cartridge.
7-11
(4) Low image density

Print sample

The density of the copied image is low. The line width
equivalent to 3 dots is thin.
Cause
Measure
1.
1.
2.
The drum is degraded.
2.
3.
The LED duty is low.
3.
Check the LED duty (maintenance code <12> "731,"

"732," "733"). See Section 9.3 for the standard value.
4.
The developer blade is worn.
4.
Replace the developer blade.
5.
The bias output of the developer unit is low.
5.
Check the developer bias voltage. See Sections 9.1.2

and 9.1.3.
Check the developer spring for contact.
6.
The charge unit discharges electricity excessively.
6.
Check the discharge level (maintenance code <09> "01").

Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal
CH1) See Section 9.1.1.
7.
The transfer unit discharges the electricity faulty.
7.
Check the charge wire (2) for looseness.

Clean the charge wire (2).
Check the transfer unit for installation condition.
Check the discharge level of the transfer unit (maintenance
code <09> "03").
Check the load current. (high-voltage power unit terminal
CH3) See Section 9.1.4.
8.
The drum is not grounded completely.
8.

Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.
9.
Unspecified toner is used.
9.
Instruct the user.
10. The developing clearance is increased due to soiled or 10. Check the DV spacers.
scratched DV spacers.
Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.
7-12
(5) Lacking (partial)
Print sample

A part of the image is not printed.
Cause
Measure
1.
The paper is dampened.
1.
Replace the paper.

Instruct the user.
2.
The toner is short or unevenly charged.
2.
Refill the toner.

If the toner is run out, check the toner amount sensor.
While there is no toner, check the magnet roller surface
for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.
3.
The drum is degraded or soiled.
3.
Replace the process cartridge. Cleaning photodegrades the

drum. So, wait until the photodegradation is no longer
observed.
4.
4.

Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance
code <09>"03").
Check the current consumption at the high-voltage
power unit terminal CH3. See Section 9.1.4.
5.
The paper does not contact the drum completely during 5.

the transfer process due to faulty paper feed such as skew.
Check the clearance between drum bottom and the

transfer guide plate.
For the skew, see "No. 5" in Section 7.2.1.
6.
Correct pressure is not applied due to deformed developer 6.

blade.
7.
The magnet roller surface is scratched or worn.
7.
Replace the magnet roller.
8.
The DV spacers are damaged.
8.
Check the DV spacers.

Check the drum surface that contacts the DV spacers.
9.
Bits are missing.
9.
Conduct the corrective action specified in "Poor image

reproduction." See the next page.
10. The paper path is not parallel.
10. Adjust the installation position of the fixation.

See Section 9.4.2
11. The agitator is deformed or incorrectly mounted.
11. Replace the agitator spring.
12. The toner is not fed smoothly since the area between the 12. Clean or replace the developer blade and the magnet roller.
developer blade and the magnet roller is blocked by dust.
7-13
(6) Poor image reproduction

Print sample

When test patterns are output, patterns are reproduced to some
extent but the following troubles are observed.
Faulty character
Bits are missing.
The image is missing in the form of 8-mm wide vertical band.
The image is repeated (randomly).
Cause
Measure
1.
The LED head is defective.
1.
Check the LED head for operation.
2.
The high-voltage power unit is incorrectly adjusted.
2.
Adjust the high-voltage power unit. See Section 9.1.
7-14
(7) Lacking (horizontal blank streak)

Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, horizontal streaks are
generated, leading to imperfect image.
Cause
Measure
1.
1.
Replace the paper.

Instruct the user.
2.
2.

Check the output of the transfer unit (maintenance
code <09>"03").
Check the load current at the high-voltage power unit
terminal CH3. See Section 9.1.4.
3.
The bias of the developer unit suffers from imperfect 3.

contact or unstable output.
Check the contact developer spring for contact

condition.
Check the developer bias output (maintenance code
<08>"02"). Adjust the bias output. See Sections 9.1.2
and 9.1.3.
4.
The magnet roller is rotation incorrectly.
Turn the gears of the developer unit to check the magnet

roller for rotation.
Check the drive system of developer unit.
The drive system (gears) of the developer unit suffers

from damage or galling.
The DV spacers are damaged or rotation is incorrectly.
4.
Check DV spacers for damage.

Check the contact surfaces between DV spacers and
the drum for deformation and dust adhesion.
7-15
(8) Lacking (vertical blank streak)
Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, blank space is generated
vertically in the form of streak.
Cause
Measure
1.
1.
Replace the paper.

Instruct the user.
2.
The charge wire 2 is soiled.
2.
Clean or replace the charge wire (2).
3.
The toner is short or unevenly charged.
3.
Refill the toner

for roughness. Replace the roller if necessary.
4.
The pressure is substantially increased due to deformed 4.

developer blade. Foreign materials are mixed into the
machine.
Check the developer blade for deformation.
5.
The LED head is faulty.

If the LED is faulty, replace the head.
6.
A part of the magnet roller is worn or scratched, resulting 6.

in short toner feeding.
Check the magnet roller surface. Check whether the toner

layer is formed on the surface and, if not, replace the
roller.
7.
A soft blocking (coagulation of toner brought by 7.

decreased fluidity) occurs in the developer unit due to
application of unspecified toner.
Instruct the user. Clean the entire developer unit.
8.
8.
9.
The LED head does not emit light.
9.
5.
10. The charge unit grid is soiled.
10. Clean the grid.
11. The toner on the magnet roller is partially thick.
11. Check whether the developer blade (DV) is scratched and,

if so, replace the blade.
7-16
(9) Black stripe on print
Print sample

When the engine test pattern is printed, the pattern is not
reproduced. Instead, black stripes are generated on the image
partially or entirely.
Cause
1.
The defects appear in the form of black or white stripes 1.

depending on the type of soiling or defective patterns.
Measure
If the relevant section is turned on, replace the LED head.
7-17
(10) Black stripe (horizontal)

Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, black bands are generated
on the paper.
Cause
Measure
1.
Charge wire 1 is soiled or foreign materials adhere on the 1.

wire.
2.
The developer blade is damaged or in imperfect contact. 2.
3.
The LED head is faulty.
4.
There are members or foreign materials that contact the 4.

paper in the paper path between the drum and the heat
roller.
Check whether there are members or foreign materials that

contact the paper.
5.
In the paper path between the drum and the heat roller, the 5.
paper is sagged to resultantly get in touch with machine
members.
Check the heat roller and suction drive systems.

Check the evacuation performance and operating
condition of the suction fan.
3.
Following lists the outer diameter and perimeter of the roller-related parts. Locate the failed part
from cycles of the trouble observed in the print sample, and then replace or clean it.
Parts
7-18
Outer diameter (mm)
Perimeter (mm)
Photosensitive drum
60
188
Heat roller
50
157
Backup roller
53
167
Developing sleeve
40
63
LED roller
12
38
(11) Black stripe (vertical)
Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, the image is reproduced but
several black stripes, whose width is less than 1 mm, are
generated in the paper feed direction.
Cause
Measure
1.
The drum is striated.

Foreign materials adhere to the drum.
1.

Check whether there are foreign materials that contact
the drum around it.
Check whether the separation finger (OPC) interferes
with the drum to scratch the drum.
2.
The heat roller is striated.
2.
Replace the heat roller.

Check whether there are foreign materials that contact
the roller heat around it.
3.
The bit of the LED is lit.
3.
When the relevant bit of the LED head is not turned off,
replace the LED head.
4.
There are members or foreign materials that contact the 4.

paper in the paper path between the drum and the heat
roller.
Check whether there are members or foreign materials that

contact the paper.
5.
In the paper path between drum and heat roller, the paper 5.
is sagged to resultantly get in touch with machine
members.
Check the heat roller and suction drive systems.

Check the evacuation performance and operating
condition of the suction fan.
6.
The cleaner blade is scratched.
6.
7-19
(12) Black banding (vertical)

Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, the image is reproduced
but several black stripes are generated in the lateral
direction (the direction normal to the paper feed direction).
Cause
Measure
1.
The drum is damaged or soiled in the direction parallel 1.

to the drum axis. (In this case, the black stripes are
generated at the interval of 180 mm.)
Replace the process cartridge. Or clean the drum if

soiled.
2.
The toner from the cleaner blade adheres to the drum

surface. (In this case, the black stripes are generated at
the interval of 180 mm.)
2.
Clean the drum. Or replace the process cartridge
3.
The heat roller surface is scratched.
3.
Check or replace the heat roller.
4.
The magnet roller surface is scratched.
4.
When the magnet roller surface is scratched, replace it.
7-20
(13) Black spot
Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, black spots are generated on
the paper.
Cause
Measure
1.
The drum is scratched or soiled. (The black sports are 1.

generated at the interval of 180 mm.)
Replace the process cartridge. Or, clean the drum if soiled.
2.
The heat roller surface is scratched or soiled.
Check and clean or replace the heat and backup rollers.
3.
After the drum passes through the bottom of the drum, it 3.

contacts the separation finger (OPC).
Check and correct the poorly discharging separation

unit. (Measure the current at the terminal CH4 of the
high-voltage power unit.) See Section 9.1.5.
Check the wire for breakage.
Check the separation unit for discharging (maintenance
code <09>"04").
Check the heat roller and backup rollers for faulty
rotation.
Check the belt (TRANS) for expansion and slip.
4.
The toner is dropping from the separation finger (OPC) 4.

and cleaner.
Clean the separation finger (OPC) and cleaner.

Check the separation finger (OPC). Replace if
necessary.
5.
The magnet roller surface is scratched to cause a leak 5.

between the developer bias and the drum.
Check the magnet roller surface for scratches. If it is

damaged, replace the roller.
Check the bias output of the developer unit (maintenance
code <09>"02"). Adjust the bias output according to the
result. See Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.
6.
The charge wire (2) is loosened.
Replace the charge wire (2).
2.
6.
7-21
(14) Unfixed toner
Print sample

If the copied characters and image are rubbed with hands,
they are easily separated from the paper.
Cause
Measure
1.
The paper is defective.
1.
Replace the paper.

Instruct the user.
2.
The heat roller is scratched or deformed.
2.
Replace the roller.
3.
The backup roller pressure is short.
3.
Check and adjust the nip pressure (maintenance code

<09> "07," 08," "09" ).
For adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.1.
7-22
(15) Registration defect
Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, registrations are shifted
vertically or horizontally.
Cause
Measure
1.
Vertical shift: The registrations are adjusted incorrectly. 1.
Adjust the top edge registration (maintenance code<11>

"01").
For adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.6.
2.
Vertical shift: The registration clutch CL04 is slippery or 2.

galled.
Replace the clutch (registration) CL04.
3.
Horizontal shift: The side registrations are adjusted 3.

incorrectly.
Adjust the side registrations. (maintenance code<11>

"02." for adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.7)
4.
Vertical shift: The registration torque limiter is faulty.
Replace the torque limiter.
4.
7-23
(16) Image slanting
Print sample

The paper is skewed and resultantly the image is printed
on the slant.
Cause
Measure
The paper is not loaded correctly.
2.
The paper feed roller nonuniformly contacts the paper. 2.

Or, the roller is nonuniformly worn.
Replace the paper feed roller.
3.
The registration roller nonuniformly contacts the pinch 3.

roller. Or, either or both rollers are nonuniformly worn.
Replace the registration and pinch rollers.
4.
The cutaway roller suffers from nonuniform contact or 4.

wear.
Replace the cutaway roller.
5.
The fixation is not mounted at the correct position.
5.
Adjust the fixation mounted position. See section 9.4.2.
6.
The nip pressure of the heat roller is improperly adjusted. 6.

Or, the pressure is imbalanced.
Adjust the nip pressure. (maintenance code <09> "07,"

"08," "09," for adjustment procedures, see Section 9.4.1.)
7-24
1.
Reload the paper.

Instruct the user.
1.
(17) Blank copy
Print sample

The paper is skewed and resultantly the image is printed
on the slant.
Cause
Measure
1.
The toner is run out.
1.
Refill the toner.

for roughness.
2.
There is no bias output on the developer unit.
2.
Check the bias output of the developer unit. (maintenance

code <09>"02")
Check the developer unit contact spring for contact
condition.
If there is no output, adjust the developer unit bias. For
adjustment procedures, see Sections 9.1.2 and 9.1.3.
3.
The transfer unit is not discharging the electricity.
3.
Check the charge wire (2) for disconnect.

Check the output of the transfer unit. (maintenance
code <09>"03", for adjustment procedures, see Sections
9.1.2 and 9.1.3.)
4.
The LED head is faulty. (Solid black copy or black stripes 4.

are observed depending on the test patterns.)
5.
The drum is not grounded correctly.
5.

Check the installation condition of the process cartridge.
6.
The agitator spring is not mounted correctly.
6.
Mount the agitator spring correctly. Replace it if

deformed.
7.
The developer unit drive system is damaged. Or, the 7.

developer motor is not rotated.
Check the drive wheel unit. Replace it if damaged.
7-25
(18) Image overlap

Print sample

The image remains on the drum and resultantly the same
image is printed on the paper.
Cause
Measure
1.
The cleaner blade suffers from imperfect contact (due to 1.

hardening or wear).
Check the cleaner blade for contact condition. Replace

it if necessary.
The blade is hardened at low temperatures.
2.
The charge elimination LED is not turned on.
2.
Check the deelectrification LED for operation. (maintenance

code <06>"05," "06")
3.
The heat roller is offset.
3.
Clean the heat roller.
4.
When the exposure drum is photodegraded with the toner 4.

image adhered to it, the image overlap defect occurs.
Leave the process cartridge in a dark place for about 12

hours.
5.
The drum is aged or degraded.
7-26
5.
(19) Skip
Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, a part of the grid pattern is
not reproduced (in the horizontal direction).
Cause
Measure
1.
The DV spacers of the developer unit are not rotated 1.

correctly. Or, the spacer surface is soiled or scratched.
Replace the DV spacers.

Check whether the surfaces that contact the DV spacers
are deformed.
2.
Gears on both edge of the drum are deformed.
2.
Check both gears for damage.
3.
The magnet roller is not rotated correctly.
3.
Check whether turning the gears will result in smooth

rotation of the magnet roller.
Check whether the DV spacers on both edge of the
magnet roller are damaged.
4.
The cleaner is blocked or the drum is not rotated correctly 4.

due to damaged gears.
Clean the cleaner.

Turn the gear to check whether the drum is operated
smoothly.
5.
Replace the paper.

Instruct the user.
6.
The drum surface suffers from soiling or dust adhesion. 6.
5.
Clean the drum, or replace the process cartridge.
7-27
(20) Smear
Print sample

When the test pattern is printed, duplicated or smeary image
is generated on the grid pattern.
Horizontal lines are duplicated or smeared.
Cause
Measure
1.
The gears and paper feed system are damaged.
1.
Replace the gears.
2.
The magnet roller is not rotated correctly.
2.
Check whether turning the gears will result in smooth

rotation of the magnet roller.
Check whether the tracking rollers on both edge of the
magnet roller are damaged.
3.
The cleaner is blocked or the drum is not rotated correctly 3.

due to damaged gears.
4.
The cutter is not working correctly.
4.
Check the paper path mechanism.
5.
The fixation is not mounted at the appropriate position.
5.
Adjust the position of the fixation. For adjustment procedures,

see Section 9.4.2.
6.
In the paper path system, there are some obstacles that 6.

hinder the paper feed.
7-28
Check the paper path system.
(21) Solid black

Is the pattern image identifiable?
Y
N
Is the charge wire working? (Check the load current of the charger. See Section 9.1.1)
Y
N
Check the CBL21 for its connection and short.
Is a blank space observed at the top or bottom edge of the print?

Y
N
Check the charger and surroundings for short.
(Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section 6.3.1(6).)
Adjust the load current of the charger. see Section 9.1.1.
If necessary, replace the LED head.
Check the load current of the charger. See Section 9.1.1.
Check the charger and surroundings for short (Execute the troubleshooting "2032." See Section
6.3.1(6).)
Check the bias output of the developer. (maintenance code <08> "02", for adjustment procedures,
see Section 9.1.2 and 9.1.3)
7-29
Chapter 8 Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)
Chapter 8
Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)
This chapter describes how to disassemble and assemble the device when it is necessary to
replace the parts.
8.1
How to Read This Manual
8.1.1
Rules for Disassembly/Assembly

This Section defines several rules used in the part replacement (disassembly/assembly)
procedures.
Note: Before disassembling the intended section, examine and comprehend the
complete installation condition. This allows you to assemble the device
smoothly.
Before replacing a part, be sure to turn the device off and unplug the
power cable from the power outlet.
To protect the photosensitive material from degradation, be sure to close
the upper cover whenever unnecessary.
Removal :
Shows the disassembling procedures. Note that some procedures are detailed in
illustrations.
Installation : Shows the assembling procedures. Since the device is assembled by executing the
disassembling procedures reversely, only precautions are described in the
assembling procedures.
Direction : Positions and directions (including those of engine interior) described in the
procedures are defined as follows (see Figure 8-1).
Front :
Front panel of the device
Right :
Right panel of the device when viewed from the front
Left
:
Left panel of the device when viewed from the front
Rear :
Rear panel of the device
8-1
8.1.2
Covers
Figure 8-1 shows the nomenclatures of the covers attached to the device.
Front cover
Top cover
Manual feed cover
Right upper cover

FDL cover
Front cover 2
Filter cover 1
Roll 1 door
Filter cover 2
Roll 2 door
Waste toner door
FDR cover
Buffer door
Left upper cover 1
Cutter door
Rear cover 1
Rear cover 2
Figure 8-1 Nomenclatures of Covers
8-2
8.2
Replacing the Parts
8.2.1
Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MRC (MRC 2 Board)

<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs)
Right upper cover
2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs)

Left upper cover
8-3
3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs)
Front cover 2
4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each)
FDL cover
FDR cover
5 Disconnect the connector provided on both side of the device.

Connector on the left side of the device
8-4
White connector CN5A (13 pins, Red and black stripes)

White connector CN5B (8 pins, Red and black stripes)
Secondary power supply translucent connector (4 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and black stripes)
Secondary power supply translucent connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)
* More connectors are used on the FM model.
White connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes)
White connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)
Blue connector (15 pins, Red and black stripes)
Secondary power supply blue connector (6 pins, Red and black stripes)
Connector on the right side of the device:

Blue connector CN3B (10 pins, Red and black stripes)
Blue connector CN4B (11 pins, Red and black stripes)
Primary power supply connector (2 pins, Black and white stripes)
Primary power supply connector (4 pins, Black and white stripes)
Secondary power supply connector (2 pins, Red and black stripes/Orange and brown stripes)
Secondary power supply connector C105 (6 pins, Orange and brown stripes)
High-voltage power supply connector (Red stripes) 4
8-5
6 Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the
connectors.
Left side of the device:
Right side of the device:
7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each)
8-6
8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box.
Electrical box
9 Remove the cable clamp (2 clamps on MF model) (2 set screws) and the cable to take out the
electrical box.
Cable clamp (for MF alone)
Cable clamp
0 Remove the board cover (set screw 8 pcs)
8-7
A Remove the MRC2 board. (set screw 8 pcs)

As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (6 set screws)
(As for MF model)
MSC2 board
B Remove EEPROM and transfer it to the new board.
EEPROM
8-8
8.2.2
Replacing the PCB-ASSY-USB (USB 2 board)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1.
Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2.
Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3.
Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4.
Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5.
Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the
connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6.
Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7.
Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1 8.
Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove
the electrical box. See Section 8.2.1 9.
Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 0.
Remove the USB board. (set screw 4 pcs and connector 1 pc.)
8-9
8.2.3
Replacing the PCB-ASSY-MEC (MEC board)

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
0
A
Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1.
Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2.
Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3.
Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4.
Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5.
Push in the cables being exit from the electrical box to the electrical box along with the
connectors. See Section 8.2.16.
Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7.
Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1
8.
Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove
Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 0.
Remove the MEC board. (set screw 6 pcs and connector 5 pcs)
As for the MF model, remove MSC2 board before removing the electrical box. (6 set screws)
NVRAM
B Remove NVRAM and transfer it to the new board.
8-10
8.2.4
Replacing the Controller Fan

<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1.
2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2.
3 Remove the front cover 2. (set screw 3 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 3.
4 Remove FDL and FDR covers. (set screw, 1 pc each) See Section 8.2.1 4.
5 Unplug connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5.
7 Remove the front cover. (set screw, 5 pcs each) See Section 8.2.1 7.
8 Remove the three set screws from the electrical box and pull out the box. See Section 8.2.1
8.
9 Remove the cable clamp by unscrewing the two set screws, disconnect the cable, and remove
0 Remove the board cover. (set screw 8 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 0.
A Remove the fan. (set screw 2 pcs)
Controller fan
8-11
8.2.5
Replacing the Paper Size Sensor and Paper Jam Sensor

<Removal>
1 Remove the cutter door. (set screw 4 pcs)
Cutter door
2 Remove the connector (1 pc each) and set screw (1 pc each) from disconnect the paper size
sensor and paper jam sensor.
8-12
8.2.6
Replacing the Cutter Unit

<Before starting the replacement>
Note: Be sure to turn the main power switch off before starting replacement,
because cutter replacement work involves connection and disconnection
of the connector.
Make sure that the connectors are correctly connected before operation,
because if the power is turned on when the connector is improperly
connected, the device will not start properly.
Be careful during the work to prevent personal injury. The cutter is bare not protected with a cover.
Main power switch
Moving blade
Fixed blade
<Removal>
1 Draw out roll 1 door. (1st stage alone)
Open the roll 1 door somewhat so that it may not interfere with removal of the cutter unit.
Roll 1 door
2 Remove the cutter cover. (Set screws 4 pcs)
8-13
3 Remove the rear cover 2. (Set screws 4 pcs)

Cutter cover
Rear cover 2
8-14
4 Unplug the connector

Note Use care when removing the connector so that the receiving side pin may
not be bent.
1. Remove the connectors for the cutter motor and the paper size sensor from connectors
CN27 and CN28 on RFU board, and then place them on the feed board box.
2. Remove the connectors wired from the low-pressure power supply on the device body,
feed pulse motor and MEC board from connectors CN21, CN22 and CN29. Then pull
them out from the side face of the feed board box and fix them on the sheet metal with
a piece of tape.
(Remove the cable from the device body since it interferes with removal of the cutter
unit.)
Fix them using tape to protect
them from damage.
Pull it upward
Pull it sideways
Cable being led from the device body
Cable of cutter unit
5 Remove the cutter center supporting sheet metal (Screws: 2 pcs)
Cutter center
supporting sheet metal
8-15
6 Remove the cutter guide supporting sheet metal (Set screws 4 pcs)
This sheet metal is provided at the bottom of the device. Reasonable care is needed in its
removal since it is somewhat difficult to remove and can be easily dropped and lost.
Pin (Pin on the opposite side is provided on the

backside of the motor)
The cutter unit is fitted to the pins on the device body. So remove the pins first.
Reasonable care must be exercised in the removal not to drop it inadvertently. (The same holds
true for the installation.)
For details of the work, see the following "Cutter Unit Removal Procedure".
<Cutter Unit Removal Procedure>
Note Don't remove all screws at one time. Otherwise, the cutter might fall off.
Be sure to support the cutter while removing the screws.
Tilt the cutter unit somewhat

and then pull it out straight.
Be sure to tilt the cutter unit. Otherwise, the

motor bottom can damage the wiring harness.
Tilt and then pull it out gradually.
Removed parts
Screws
Covers
Small part
8-16
: 14 pcs
: Rear cover 2 and cutter cover 1 pcs for each
: Cutter center supporting sheet metal 1 pcs
<Installation>
1 Install the replacing cutter. (Set screws 6 pcs)
Install the cutter in the procedure reverse to the removal.
1. Tilt the cutter somewhat and then install it straight.

Like in the removal, use care not to damage the cable on the bottom of the cutter motor.
When fixing the unit with the screws, hold the unit with hand while taking care not to
lose the screws.
2. Fit the cutter unit to the pins on the device body.

3. After fitting to the pins, fix the cutter unit with the screws.
Cutter center
supporting sheet metal
Position of the screws for the cutter center supporting
sheet metal depends on the given model.
Butt position
For 1- or 2-stage
feed
8-17
2 Plug the connector.

1. Lead in the cutter motor connector and the paper size sensor connector of the cutter
unit through the top and insert them to connectors CN27 and CN28 on the RFU board.
2. Lead in the connectors from the low-voltage power supply on the device body, feed
pulse motor and MEC board through the side face and then insert to connectors CN21,
CN22 and CN29 on RFU board.
Use care so that cables may not

be caught with surrounding parts.
3 Install the cutter cover and rear cover 2, and then close the roll 1 door. (Set screws 8 pcs)
Cutter cover
Rear cover 2
Roll 1 door
4 Turn on the main power switch and proceed to adjustment of the cut length accuracy.
It is a must to confirm the normal operation of the device and to adjust squareness of the cut.
For adjustment of squareness of the cut, see 9.4.3 of this document.
8-18
8.2.7
Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit

<Removal>
5 Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5.
connectors. See Section 8.2.1 6
8.
0 Unplug the all connectors from the high voltage power unit.
A Remove the high voltage power unit. (set screw 9 pcs)
High-voltage power supply unit

Remove the cable and then install on
the new high-voltage power supply unit.
8-19
8.2.8
Replacing the Low Voltage Power Unit

<Removal>
5 Unplug the connectors. See Section 8.2.1 5.
8.
0 Unplug the all connectors from the low voltage power unit.
A Remove the low voltage power unit. (set screw 6 pcs)
Low-voltage power supply unit

The screw is not provided in this portion on the
low-voltage power supply models with the
improved sturdiness against damages.
8-20
8.2.9
Replacing the Power Switch

<Removal>
2 Unplug the power switch connectors.
Power switch
connectors
3 Remove the bracket that secures the power switch and remove the switch. (set screw 2 pcs)
8-21
8.2.10 Replacing the Filter

<Removal>
1 Remove the filter cover 1 or filter cover 2.
2 Remove respective filters.
Filter cover 1
Filter cover 2
8-22
8.2.11 Replace the waste toner bottle switch and the waste toner sensor.
<Removal>
2 Remove the waste toner bottle.
Waste toner bottle
3 Remove the sheet metals. (Set screws 2 pcs for each sheet metal)
When removing TS02 sensor, remove the sheet metal on MS05 switch first and then remove the sheet
metal on TS02 sensor.
Sheet metal on TS02 sensor
Sheet metal on MS05

sensor
4 Remove MS05 switch or TS02 sensor. (Set screws 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs for each)
TS02 sensor
MS05 switch
8-23
8.2.12 Replacing the Fixation Unit

<Removal>
3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 7 pcs)
Front cover
4 Remove cover (FDL) and cover (FDR). (Set screws 1 pcs for each)
Cover (FDL)
Cover (FDR)
5 Remove the manual feed drawer. (Set screws 2 pcs)
Manual feed drawer
8-24
6 Pull and remove the manual feed tray.
Manual feed tray
7 Remove the connectors on the right side of the device. (1 connector for fan, 1 connector for
temperature fuse, 1 connector for halogen lamp, 2 connectors for thermister, 1 connector for
each of MS06-1 and MS06-2 and 1 connector for PS07.)
Connector for fan
MS06-1 (Blue)
Connector for
temperature fuse
(Yellow)
Connector for halogen lamp

Connector for
Connector for
thermister (White)
thermister (Red)
MS06-2 (White)
Connector for PS07
8-25
8 Remove the fan unit. (Set screws 5 pcs)
Fan unit
9 Remove MS06 unit. (Set screws 1 pcs)
MS06 unit
8-26
0 Remove the fixation unit motor. (Set screws 2 pcs and connector 1 pcs)
Fixation unit motor
Connector
A Remove 1 set screw of the fixing sheet metal for the alignment adjusting screw.
Alignment adjusting screw

Set screw for fixing sheet metal
B Loosen 4 sets screws on both sides of the fixation unit.
8-27
C Pull out the right side of the fixation unit by the length equal to the slot in the setscrew
section for the fixation unit.
Pull it out by this length.
Pull it out by this

length.
D Make sure the fixing sheet metal is detached from the device. Remove the fixing sheet plate
and the alignment adjusting screw by turning the alignment adjusting screw.
Alignment adjusting screw
Fixing sheet metal
E Push back the right side of the fixation unit and then move the wiring harness for the
halogen lamp, thermister and temperature fuse toward the right side of the fixation unit
(from the outside of the right side plate to its inside). Move the wiring harness of PS07 to
the outside of the right side plate.
F Remove the fixation unit. (Set screws 4 pcs)
Fixation unit
8-28
8-29
8.2.13 Replacing the Wheel Unit and Clutch ASSY

<Removal>
2 Open the clamshell.
Clamshell
Process cartridge
3
4
5
6
Remove the process cartridge.

Remove the transcription separator. See Section 8.2.23.
Unplug the connector (motor part 2 pcs)
Loosen the bolt on the tension drum plate, move the plate to the left, and retighten the
screw to set the plate.
Boss (wound)
Pulley (64)
Tension drum plate set screw
Timing drum (belt)
The connector of
procedure 5
8-30
7
8
9
0
Remove the timing drum (belt).

Remove the boss (wound). (hexagon socket set screw 2 pcs)
Remove the pulley (64).
Remove the boss stopper. (hexagon socket set screw 2 pcs)
Boss stopper
A Remove the drum gear.

B Remove the support (left drum). (inner set screw 2 pcs, outer set screw 1 pc)
Support (left drum)
Drum gear
8-31
C Remove the wheel unit. (set screw 4 pcs)

This screw is longer than others. Use care in the installation not to mistake
it for others (Printed as LS on the sheet metal).
Clutch assembly
Clutch assembly
Wheel unit
D Unplug the connector from each clutch ASSY (2 pcs). (1 pc each)

E Remove the clutch ASSY.
8-32
8.2.14 Replacing the Main Motor

<Removal>
1 Remove the wheel unit. See Section 8.2.13.
2 Remove the tension spring.
Tension spring
3 Loosen the four set screws and move up and down the main motor, loosen the timing belt.
Main motor
4 Remove the main motor. (set screw 4 pcs)
8-33
8.2.15 Replacing the Transport (suction).

<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (Set screws 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1.
2 Open the clamshell. See Section 8.2.13 2.
3 Remove the process cartridge. See Section 8.2.13 3.
4 Remove the transfer separator. (equipped with a hook at the right.)
Transfer separator
5 Unplug the two connectors from the transport ASSY.
Connector (Blue)
Connector (White)
8-34
6 Remove the transport ASSY. (set screw, left/right 1 pc each)

Note: Care must be exercised in removing the transport ASSY so that PS06
may not be broken.
Transport ASSY
Connector
8-35
8.2.16 Replacing the Halogen Lamp on Fuser Unit

<Removal>
1 Remove the fuser unit. See Section 8.2.12.
2 Unplug connectors from both sides of the halogen lamp and remove the right and left fuser
holders. (set screw 1 pc each)
Fuser holder (left)
Fuser holder (right)
3 Remove the stopper (heat roll).

4 Pull out the halogen lamp.
Note: Pay attention not to touch the transparent glass of the halogen lamp
during the work. If you touch the glass, wipe it with a rag dampened with
alcohol.
<Installation>
Note When installing, fit the halogen lamp securely. Don't leave it in loosened
state.
After replacement, adjust the alignment again. -> 9.4.2 Adjusting the Skew/Slack
8-36
8.2.17 Replacing the BL01 ASSY (suction fan)

<Removal>
1 Remove the transport. See Section 8.2.15.
2 Unplug the connector,
3 Remove the fan. (set screw 2 pcs, connector 1 pc)
Connector
Cut off this portion for older models

(it interferes with the sheet metal in
the rear side).
8-37
8.2.18 Replacing the Thermistor on Fixation

<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 1
2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1 2
3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 9 pcs) * 7 pcs in Rev. D
4 Remove the fan unit. (set screw 5 pcs, fan connector 1 pc) See Section 8.2.12 8
* If it is bundled with Insulock tie, cut Insulock tie.
5 Remove the fixation cover. (set screw 3 pcs)
6 Unscrew the set screws and remove the thermistors.

This thermister is connected to
the red connector.
Enlarged figure
Note: Plug the red connectors in the left thermistor shown in the picture above.
Note: If the fan unit was bundled with Insulock tie, bundle it likewise in installation, too.
8-38
8.2.19 Replacing the Fan on Fuser

<Removal>
3 Remove the front cover. (set screw 9 pcs) See Section 8.2.12 3. * 7 pcs in Rev. D
4 Unplug the connector. (1 pc each)
5 Remove the fan. (set screw, 2 pcs each)
8-39
8.2.20 Replacing the Charger Fan

<Removal>
4 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs)
5 Close the clamshell.
6 Remove the plate spring and bracket clamshell (2 pcs each). (Set screws 1 pc on each side)
Plate spring (it is

tightened together with
the bracket clamshell)
Enlarged view
Plate spring
8-40

* Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it.
8 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (set screws 3 pcs and connector 1 pc) See Section
8.2.24.
Charge elimination
ASSY
9 Remove the fan. ( set screw 2 pcs each) (connector 1 pc)
Note When closing the clamshell after replacing the fan, care must be used to
prevent the ferrite core bumping against the developer unit.
8-41
8.2.21 Replacing the Process Unit

<Removal>
2 Pull out and remove the process unit.
Process unit
8-42
8.2.22 Replacing the LED Head

In the case of PL model
<Removal>
4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 8.2.21 2.
7 Remove the two plate springs and the two bracket clamshells. (set screw left/right 1 pc
each.)
Plate spring (it is

tightened together with
the bracket clamshell)
Enlarged view
Plate spring
8-43

* Open the clamshell slowly while pushing it.
9 Unplug the three connectors of LED head.
0 Remove the right and left move guides. (set screw 2 pcs each)
Guide (MOVE)
A Remove the LED head

Note: After the replacement of LED head, the LED head joint must be adjusted.
For details, see Section 9.6 "Adjusting the LED Head Joint."
8-44
In the case of MF model

<Removal>
1 Remove the developer unit
2 Install the pinch unit. (Set screw 4 pcs)
To install the pinch unit easier, change the screw position on the side to keep the clamshell
open.
Change the screw position
Pinch unit
3 Remove the cable of the LED head.

Close the clamshell and then remove the LED head cable through the device back face.
8-45
4 Remove the LED head. (Set screws 4 pcs)

Return the screw being moved in step 2 to the original position and then fully open the
clamshell. Remove LED-MOVE on both sides and then take out the LED head. Care must be
exercised in removing LED-MOVE so that the LED head may not be inadvertently dropped.
Restore the original screw position
<Installation>
1 Install LED-HEAD and fix it with LED-MOVE of both sides.
2 Close the clamshell and then connect 4 LED head cables through the back face.
3 Remove the pinch unit.
Modify the fixing position on both sides and then partially open the clamshell. Remove the
pinch unit. (Set screws 4 pcs)
4 Install the developer unit.
Note Don't fully open the clamshell while the developer unit is removed.
Otherwise, FR4 and FR5 can be disengaged.
Be sure that the pinch unit has been installed before opening the
clamshell fully.
8-46
8.2.23 Replacing the Transfer Separator

<Removal>
1 Remove the process unit.
2 Remove the transfer separator by unlatching the two hooks.
Installation
Note: Check the transfer separator is correctly fixed to the specified position.
Note: Whenever installing the transfer separator, be sure to insert its left side
first.
8-47
8.2.24 Replacing the Charge Elimination ASSY (charge elimination LED)

<Removal>
5 Remove the charge elimination ASSY. (Set screws 3 pcs and connector 1 pc)
Charge elimination
ASSY
8-48
8.2.25 Replacing the Developer

<Removal>
4 Pull out and remove the process unit. See Section 8.2.21 2.
5 Remove the top cover. (set screw 6 pcs each)
7 Change fixing positions of right and left stoppers.
8-49
8 Unplug the connector.
Connnector
9 Open the buffer door.
Buffer door

A Remove the registration pinch frame.(set screw 4 pcs)
Registration pinch frame
8-50
B Remove the clamped cable.
The cable is clamped

on the backside of
this portion.
C Remove the rear cover. (set screw 5 pcs)

Rear cover
D Remove the left DEV angle and right DEV angle. (set screw 1 pc each)
Left DEV angle
Right DEV angle
E Remove the developer.
8-51
8.2.26 Replacing the Developer DV Spacer

<Removal>
1 Remove the developer.
2 Remove the stopper and wave washer from the developer right side. (set screw 2 pcs)
Stopper
Wave washer
3 Remove the gear from the developer left side.

1. Remove the E-ring of gear (idler 2) .
2. Remove the gear (idler 2).
3. Remove the gear (idler 1).
4. Remove the E-ring of gear (magnet roll).
5. Remove the gear (magnet roll).
6. Remove the screw (2 pcs).
7. Remove the bearing.
Bearing
Gear (idler 1)
Gear (idler 1)
Screw
DV spacer
E-ring of gear (idler 2)
E-ring of gear (magnet roll)
4 Remove the DV spacer.

1. Remove the gear (magnet roll).
2. Remove the DV spacer.
<Installation>
Note: The gear (magnet roll) has front and back faces. Mount the gear with its
light-blue face.
8-52
8.2.27 Replacing the Developer Blade

Note: The toner may spill out during the work. Lay the cover such as newspaper on the floor.
<Removal>
1 Remove the magnet roller. See Section 8.2.26 4.
Place the removed magnet roller as shown in the picture.

2 Remove the developer blade.
1. Remove the left and right screws (total 2 pcs) from the blade holder.
2. Remove the blade together with the holder.

3. Loosen the set screw from the blade plate.
4. Remove the blade.
8-53
<Installation>
Note: After a new blade is mounted to the blade holder, apply the toner to the
blade tip.
Apply the
toner over the
entire blade
tip.
Before installing the blade assembly, remove the toner from the magnet
roller and developer chassis using a vacuum cleaner.
Remove the toner from

the developer chassis.
8-54
8.2.28 Replacing the INT1 (Upper Door Interlock Switch)

<Removal>
3 Remove the INT1.
1. Unplug the connector.
2. Disconnect the INT1.
INT1
8-55
8.2.29 Replacing the INT3 (Buffer Door Interlock Switch)

<Removal>
2 Open the buffer door. (remove the two thumb screws.)
Buffer door
3 Disconnect the INT3.

4 Remove the bracket (INT3) (set screw 2 pcs)
5 Remove the INT3.
INT3
8-56
8.2.30 Replacing the Paper Registration Sensor

<Removal>
1 Open the buffer door.
3 Remove the registration pinch frame. See Section 8.2.25 0.
4 Unplug the connector and remove the PS05.
8-57
8.2.31 Replacing the Manual Feed Sensor

<Removal>
1 Pull out the manual feed tray.
2 Unplug the connector and remove the PS15.(set screw 1 pc)
8-58
8.2.32 Replacing the Control Panel

<Removal>
2 Remove the control panel.
2. Remove the two set screws.
8-59
8.2.33 Replacing the Roll Paper Feed Motors (FM01and FM02)

<Removal>
(Procedures shown below are common to upper, middle, and lower trays.)
1 Remove the roll paper feed unit:
1. Pull out the roll door.
2. Remove the roll paper feed unit. (set screw 4 pcs)
Note: Place the roll paper feed unit with the handle-attached face downward.
2 Remove the motor.
2. Remove the two set screws.
3. Remove the motor.
FM01(FM02)
8-60
<Installation>
When installing the roll paper feed unit, fix it with screws as shown below.
1 Fix the left side of the roll paper feed unit in 2 positions.
2 Close the roll paper feed unit once and then open it slightly again. Then fix a position in the
front right side of the roll paper feed unit with a screw.
3 Open the roll paper feed unit fully and screw-fix a position in the back of the unit.
8-61
8.2.34 Replacing the Sensors on Roll Paper Feed Unit (PS11, PS12, PS21, PS22, PS31, and
PS32)
PS11 ASSY ( Roll 1 paper end sensor 1)
PS12 ASSY ( Roll 2 paper end sensor 1)
PS21 ASSY ( Roll 1 door switch)
PS22 ASSY ( Roll 2 door switch)
<Removal>
1 Pull out the roll 1 and roll 2 doors.
2 Remove PS31 and PS32.
Remove PS21 and PS22.
Remove PS11 and PS12.
1. Unplug the connector from each sensor.
2. Remove the relevant sensors.
When the roll door cover is removed by unscrewing the four set screws and the latch metal is
removed by unscrewing the set screw, PS21 and PS22 can easily be removed.
PS11,12
8-62
PS21,22
8.2.35 Replacing the Gas Spring
<Removal>
1 Remove the right upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1. 1
2 Remove the left upper cover. (set screw 6 pcs) See Section 8.2.1. 2
3 Remove the E-ring and set screw, and remove the gas spring.
Note When replacing the gas springs, do it one by one starting with the right
side (or left side) one. Don't remove the gas springs on both sides at one
time.
Gas spring
8-63
8.2.36 Replacing the heat roller

<Removal>
1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 8.2.12.
2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 8.2.16.
3 Remove the stay (motor HM). (Set screws 2 pcs)
4 Remove the ejector (top) assembly. (KL clip 1 pc)
Stay (motor HM)
KL clip
Ejector (top) assembly
5 Remove the cover (heat roller). (Set screws 2 pcs)
6 Remove the ejector (top) assembly retaining spring. (Retaining spring 1 pc and set screw 1 pc
on each side)
7 Remove the paper guide (bottom) assembly. (Set screws 2 pcs)
Cover (heat roller)
Ejector (top)
assembly retaining
panel
Paper guide
(bottom) assembly
8-64
8 Remove gear (Z35-Z15) and gear (Z19) on the left side of the fixation unit. (E-ring 2 pcs)
9 Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the left side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are
engaged with the heat roller)
0 Remove the gear (heat roller).
Gear (Z35-Z15)
Gear (Z19)
Gear (heat roller)
Stopper (heat roller)
Gear (Z19)
A Remove the stopper (heat roller) on the right side of the fixation unit. (Pawls in 2 positions are
engaged with the heat roller)
B Remove the spacer (sleeve). (Right side alone)
C Remove the sleeve (heat roller). (1 pc on each side)
D Remove the bearing (heat roller). (1 pc on each side)
Bearing (heat roller)
Sleeve (heat roller)
Spacer (sleeve)
Stopper (heat roller)
8-65
E Remove the heat roller.
Note When assembling a new heat roller, clean the entire heat roller surface
with HR cleaner.
8-66
8.2.37 Replacing the backup roller

<Removal>
1 Remove the fixation unit. See Section 8.2.12.
2 Remove the halogen lamp. See Section 8.2.16.
3 Remove the heat roller. See Section 8.2.36.
4 Remove the cover (FU top) assembly. (Set screws 3 pcs)
Cover (FU top)

assembly
5 Remove the lever (cam). (Set screw 1 pc)

6 Remove the holder (shaft L) and holder (shaft R). (E-ring 2 pcs on each side)
Backup roller assembly
Holder (shaft R)
* Holder (shaft L) is
provided on the
opposite side (left
side)
Lever (cam)
8-67
7 Remove the fame (FU top) assembly. (Set screws 4 pcs. It is allowed to leave the cables on the
frame.)
Frame (FU top) assembly
8 Remove the backup roller assembly.
Backup roller assembly
9 Remove C-ring and then remove bearing (backup roller). (2 pcs on each side)
0 Remove the shaft (backup roller).
Bearing (backup roller)
C-ring
Shaft (backup roller)
Note Even if the backup roller may be cooled down, the shat (backup roller)
sometimes remains hot. Be careful to avoid burn.
8-68
8.2.38 Cleaning Primary Wire
Table 8-1 Maintenance Priority
Black Line
Black Belt
(Media Feed direction)
Clean
WIRE
(CHARGER)
Clean
BLADE
(CHARGER)
Exchange
WIRE
(CHARGER)
Exchange
BLADE
(CHARGER)
Exchange
Process
Cartridge
1st
2nd
3rd
4th
5th
2nd
3rd
Black Spot
Black Line
(Roll Width Direction)
1st
Fog
(Background Cloud)
1st
2nd
3rd
Uneven Image Density
1st
2nd
3rd
White Spot,
White Line
(Roll Width Direction)
1st
Partial Lacking
(Media Feed direction)
1st
2nd
1st
Black Copy
3rd
2nd
Necessary tools
a.Screwdriver (+)
b. Swabs
c. Ethanol (99.5%)
d. Cotton Ciegal
Swabs
Ethanol
Cotton Ciegal
8-69
1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)ASSY). (Two setscrews)
CASE (CHARGER)
2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.
WIRE (CHARGER)
WIRE (CHARGER)
Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs
wetted by ethanol.
8-70
3 Clean the wire (WIRE(CHARGER)).

(1) Prepare two swabs wetted by ethanol.
(2) Nip the Wire by two swabs wetted by ethanol.
(3) Move the two swabs right and left.
Note: a. You may clean the wire even when you have only one swab. See
pictures below.
b. Be careful not to cut or bend the wire.
c. Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs
wetted by ethanol.
(Example of cleaning by two swabs)
(Example of cleaning by one swab)
4 After cleaning, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two setscrews.
WIRE (CHARGER)
8-71
8.2.39 Exchanging Primary Wire

Necessary tools and part
a.Screwdriver (+)
b. Tweezers
c. Ethanol (99.5%)
d. Cotton Ciegal
Cotton Ciegal
Ethanol
Tweezers
Cotton ciegal
e. WIRE (CHARGER)
Note: Do not touch the wire by hand. If touched, clean the wire by swabs wetted
by ethanol.
1 Remove case (CASE (CHARGER)). (Two setscrews)
CASE (CHARGER)
2 The wire (WIRE (CHARGER) can be seen.
WIRE (CHARGER)
8-72
WIRE (CHARGER)
3 Detaching tired Primary Wire

(1)
Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers, and unhook from support.
(2)
Pick the other side (fixed side) by tweezers, and unhook from support.
8-73
4 Attaching new Primary Wire

(1)
Prepare detached SPRING (CHARGER) and new WIRE (CHARGER).
SPRING (CHARGER)
WIRE (CHARGER)
(2)
Pick one terminal of the Wire by tweezers, and hook it onto support.
(3)
Hook another terminal of the Wire with SPRING (CHARGER), and hook it onto
support.
Note: Pick SPRING (CHARGER) by tweezers as below to make the procedure
easier.
8-74
(4)
Check whether bent or soiled wire has been attached to the process cartridge or not.
Note: If the wire is soiled, clean it again. If the wire is bent, replace it again.
WIRE (CHARGER)
(5)
After Exchanging, put CASE (CHARGER) on initial position and fix it with two
setscrews.
CASE (CHARGER)
Note: Be careful not to bend the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) fixed to the

BLADE(CLEANER) with setscrew.
Make sure the PLATE (CLEANER_FG) correctly touch to the CASE
(CHARGER).
PLATE(CLEANER_FG)
8-75
8.2.40 Cleaning and Exchanging Cleaner Blade

Necessary tools
a. Screwdriver (+)
b. Adjust Gauge : JIGU(CLEANER BLADE)
c. Ethanol (99.5%)
d. Cotton Ciegal
e. Vaccume cleaner for toners
Adjust Gauge
1 Remove five setscrews, and detach BLADE(CLEANER).
BLADE (CLEANER)
Five setscrews and two plates
BLADE (CLEANER)
Blade rubber
BLADE (CLEANER)
Aluminum holder
Note: BLADE(CLEANER) consists of an aluminum holder and a blade rubber.

Do not touch the blade rubber by hands.
If touched, clean the blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol.
Vacuum the toner on the blade rubber with the Vacuum cleaner for
toners.
8-76
2 Wipe blade rubber by Cotton Ciegal.

Note: If the blade rubber is strongly soiled, use Cotton Ciegal wetted by ethanol.
If the blade rubber is damaged or cannot be cleaned any more, replace
BLADE (CLEANER).
Blade rubber
3 After cleaning, sprinkle new toner for lubrication on the blade rubber.
Wipe some toner off from the development sleeve with cotton ciegal.
Brush the blade rubber with the cotton ciegal to spread toner.
Blade rubber
Aluminum holder
Blade rubber
Spread toner here.

BLADE (CLEANER)
8-77
Note: Do not spread new toner on the blade rubber while blade rubber is wetted
right after cleaning by ethanol.
Use new toner for spreading on the blade rubber. Do not use waste
toner.
BLADE(CLEANER)
Waste toner bottle
4 Attach cleaner blade to initial position and fix it with five setscrews. Press the blade against
the adjust gauge to fix.
Note: Keep just 2mm (0.08 inch) of gap between blade and chassis at left, midleft, center, mid-right and right.
Keep space with the adjust gauge and press the blade against the gauge.
Fix the blade with screws in the following order: center, mid-left, mid-right,
left-end and right-end, or in reverse order as center, mid-right, mid-left,
right-end and left-end.
Adjust Gauge
BLADE (CLEANER)
2 (+/-0.2) mm
0.08 (+/-0.008) inch
8-78
5 After cleaner blade is attached, clean toner around the process cartridge.
BLADE (CLEANER)
8-79
8.2.41 Cleaning of OPC Photosensitive drum

1 Remove the process cartridge.
2 Place the process cartridge on the table directing its grip downward.
3 Repackage OPC cleaner into a smaller sized container and then apply an appropriate amount
of it to a piece soft cloth such as cotton ciegal.
4 Clean the photosensitive drum surface.
8-80
5 Rotate the gear section of the photosensitive drum with hand and then rotate the
photosensitive drum in the paper feed direction.
6 Repeat above steps 4 and 5.
8-81
Chapter 9 Adjustment
Chapter 9
Adjustment
This chapter describes how to adjust each part of the engine in this device.
9.1
Adjusting the Voltage and Current of High Voltage Power Unit
Method of adjusting the primary charger load current, developer AC bias, developer DC bias,
transfer unit load current, and separator AC bias are described.
9-1
9.1.1
Adjusting the Primary Charger Load Current

1 Remove front cover.
2 Insert the tester probes into the CH1 terminals, and operate the primary charger with the
maintenance code <09> "01" in the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the load current Icc of the charging wire.
For the measurement, use the DC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read
100 A for 100 mV.
3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH1 control using a screwdriver for power supply
adjustment.
CH1 terminals
Setting range: -865 to -935 A (Reading of tester = 0.865 to 0.935 V)

Target value: -900 A (Reading of tester = 0.9 V)
9-2
9.1.2
Developer AC Bias
2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2AC terminals, and operate the developer AC bias with
the maintenance code <09> "02" in the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the AC load current Vdba.
For the measurement, use the AC voltage as a measuring position of the tester, and read
100 V for 100 mV.
3 If the adjustment is necessary, rotate the CH2AC control using a screwdriver for power
supply adjustment.
CH1 terminals
Setting range: 1.40 to 1.50 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 0.625 to 0.675 V)

Target value: 1.45 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 0.65 V)
9-3
9.1.3
Developer DC Bias
Note:
The developer DC bias must be adjusted after the developer AC bias was
adjusted.

2 Insert the tester probes into the CH2DC terminals, and operate the developer DC bias with
the maintenance code <09> "02" in the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the DC load current Vdba.
100 V for 100 mV.
3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH2DC adjusting volume using the
screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.
CH2DC terminal
Setting range: -270 to -290 V (Reading of tester: 0.27 to 0.29 V)

Target value: -280 V (Reading of tester: 0.28 V)
9-4
9.1.4
Transfer Load Current

2 Insert the tester probes into the CH3 terminals, and operate the transfer with the
maintenance code <09> "03" in the engine maintenance mode (see Section 2.3.9) to
measure the load current Itcd of the transfer wire.
100 A for 100 mV.
3 When adjustment is needed, do it by turning the CH3 adjusting volume using the
screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.
CH3 terminal
Setting range: 570 to 630 A (Reading of tester: 0.570 to 0.630 V)

Target value: 600 A (Reading of tester: 0.6 V)
9-5
9.1.5
Separator AC Bias
2 Insert the tester terminal into the CH4 terminal on the high voltage power unit, use the
maintenance code <09>"04" (see Section 2.3.9) of the engine maintenance mode to
operate the separator AC bias, and measure the AC load voltage Vdca. On the tester, select
the AC voltage measurement position and read 1 V as 1000 V.
Note
DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.
3 If the adjustment is needed, turn the CH4 control volume using a flat blade screwdriver,
which is specialized for adjustment of power unit, to adjust the voltage.
CH4 terminal
Setting range: 12.0 to 13.0 Vp-p (Reading of tester: 4.3 to 4.7 V)

Target value: 12.5 kVp-p (Reading of tester: 4.5 V)
9-6
9.2
Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit
This section covers verification procedures for the voltage of the low-voltage power unit.
2 According to the voltage you want to check, insert the tester terminal to TP1 to TP4 pins.
Voltage value 24 V 1.2 V : TP1 (24 V), TP2 (GND)
Voltage value 5.1 V 0.005 V : TP3 (5.1 V), TP4 (GND)
Note
TP4
DC voltage must be used in the tester setting position.
TP3
VR71
TP1
TP2
3 When adjustment +5.1 V is needed, do it by turning the adjustment volume (VR71) using
the screwdriver for the power supply adjustment.
9-7
9.3
Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head
As each LED head has different light quantity, if the LED head is replaced, the light emitting
STB width and the density change width must be set.
The LED light quantity label has been attached to the LED head, and therefore set the light
emitting STB width and the density change width following the light quantity given on the label.
For setting the light emitting STB width and the density change width, select the maintenance
code <12>, subcode "731 - 739" in the maintenance mode. For the setting procedure, see 2.3.12.
After setting, execute the engine test print (maintenance code <10>) to check that normal plotting
is outputted.
Hint: In case of a print quality failure such as uneven density and variations in line
thickness, try to set larger STB value than the value listed in the
corresponding table.
Table 9-1 Corresponding Table between LED Light Quantity and Light Emitting STB Value
Average light
quantity
STB
value
STB
width
Average light
quantity
STB
value
STB
width
1.100
1.110
1.120
1.130
1.140
1.150
1.160
1.170
1.180
1.190
1.200
1.210
1.220
1.230
1.240
1.250
1.260
1.270
1.280
1.290
1.300
28
28
28
28
27
27
27
27
26
26
26
26
26
25
25
25
25
25
24
24
24
5
5
5
5
5
5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
1.310
1.320
1.330
1.340
1.350
1.360
1.370
1.380
1.390
1.400
1.410
1.420
1.430
1.440
1.450
1.460
1.470
1.480
1.490
1.500
24
24
23
23
23
23
23
23
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
21
21
21
21
21
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
3
3
Observing the average light quantity of the LED head, set the HEAD_A, B, C from the above table.
Then, perform the test print of "2 by 2" vertically to check that there is no density difference.
(If the error diffusion data can be outputted, also print the error diffusion data for checking.)
If different, change the STB width of HEAD_A, C to adjust the density. At this time, select the
STB width according to the STB value from the following table and enter it.
9-8
STB value
STB width
STB value
STB width
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
4
4
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
5
5
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
6
6
6
6
6
6
7
7
7
7
7
9.4
Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items
The items that do not satisfy the reference values in "7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a
Plotting Specification Failure" and other adjustment items are listed in Table 9-2.
Referring to the corresponding items in Table 9-2, enter the engine maintenance mode to adjust,
or take corrective measures following the reference sections.
Table 9-2 Adjustment Items in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure
Item
Adjustment of
fixation nip pressure
Adjustment of
skew/slackness
Cut squareness
Output
Output paper
Control
length for
width for
(adjustment) item
adjustment
adjustment
Pressure of the
400 mm
A0
pressure roller
Output paper type for

adjustment
Print engine test

pattern
Normal paper
No.5
A0
Normal paper
No.15
A0
Normal paper
No.15
Adjustment: See Section 9.4.1.

Fixation position
1189 mm

Cutter mount
height
1189 mm

Normal paper / tracing
paper (75 g) / film
297 mm
A0
No.15
paper (75 g) / film
Cut length accuracy*
210 mm
A0
paper (75 g) / film
Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: line).
The cut length is reduced if numeric value is increased (1 line = 0.042333 mm).
When the set value is increased, the cut length will be decreased. (1 line = 0.042333 mm)
Print length
accuracy*
Top edge
registration*
1189 mm
A0
1189 mm
A0
Center registration*
Normal paper
No.15
Remarks: The print length is reduced if numeric value is increased.

(About 3.3 mm per 841 mm is reduced if there is a 5 Hz change)
1189 mm A0
paper (75 g) / film
297 mm
A0
No.15
paper (75 g) / film
210 mm
A0
paper (75 g) / film
Remarks: Default value varies depending on the print length and type of paper roll (unit: msec).
The print start position reverses if numeric value is increased (10 msec = 0.8 mm).
1189 mm
A0
Normal paper
No.15
Remarks: The print position is shifted to the left if numeric value is increased (1 byte = 0.508 mm).
Fixation position
1189 mm
A0
Normal paper
No.15
Checking Skew
Items to be adjusted in the engine maintenance mode.

Select maintenance code <12> if the condition and value to be adjusted are known in advance.
Select maintenance code <11> if the adjustment is performed after test print and measurement.
9-9
9.4.1
Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure
WARNING
-
Immediately after the operation, the fixation and hexagon head screws are
hot. So, keep away from these parts. Otherwise, you may be burned.
Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.
1 Set the A1 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer).

2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and perform the maintenance code <09>"07," "08" or
"09" (see Section 2.3.9). Test prints are output.
3 Measure the black band, which is printed at the position 30 to 40 cm away from the top
edge of the test print, at both sides. (See the figure below.)
7.50.5 mm
7.50.5 mm
30 to 40 cm
Paper feed direction
25 mm
25 mm
Reference value: Width of the black band = 7.5 0.5 mm

Difference between left and right = 0.5 mm or less
4 When the value is deviated from the standard value, open the top door (door 6) and adjust it by
turning the nip adjustment screws being provided on both sides of the fixation unit (first loosen
the nut that is fixing the nip adjustment screws).
Fixation adjustment
screw
Turning the screw clockwise :

Decreases the nip pressure.
Turning the screw counterclockwise :
Increases the nip pressure.
5 Repeat steps 2 to 4 until the adjusting meet the reference values.

6 Retighten the nut loosened in the previous steps to adjust the nip pressure.
9-10
9.4.2
Adjusting the Skew/Slack
WARNING
-
Don't touch the fixation and hexagon head screw right after the operation.
These components become hot and may result in burns.
Care must be exercised in the adjustment to avoid burn.
1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in roll 1 (upper drawer).

2 Turn on the engine maintenance mode and check the nip voltage for appropriateness. If it is
off the standard value, adjust it. see Section 9.4.1 Adjusting the Fixation Nip Pressure.
3 Print 3 copies of the engine test pattern No.5 consecutively.
(see Section 2.3.10 Maintenance Code 10 "PRINT" (Print) Engine maintenance code
<10>"05")
4 Check the rear end of the roll for smear without registration (several millimeters wide
wedge-shaped horizontal lines).
5 If a smear appears, remove the right upper cover, left upper cover, front cover, cover
(FDL), cover (FDR) and manual feed drawer from the device body. Insert papers between
the open/close sensors for the fixation door and the manual feed drawer to simulate the
closed state of the door. Then adjust the fixation unit alignment and the heat roller speed.
a) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the right side of a print sample
(right side of the device)
-> Push the right side of the fixation unit toward backside of the device.
13cm
b) If horizontal lines of the smear are conspicuous on the left side of a print sample (left
side of the device)
-> Pull the right side of the fixation unit toward front side the device.
13cm
9-11
Use the alignment adjusting

screw for the adjustment.
Clockwise turn: Pushes back the
right side of the fixation unit
Counterclockwise turn: Pulls out
the right side of the fixation unit
Note Be sure to loosen 2 set screws on the fixation unit before adjusting.
1) Mark the initial positions of the top and bottom screws fixing the fixation unit on the
right side plate.
2) Turning the alignment adjusting screw, move the fixation unit until the horizontal lines
of the smear are moved to the left side. (Try to move about 1 mm from the original
position, though the distance depends on the magnitude of the smear.)
3) Mark the screw position as the horizontal lines of the smear are moved to the left side.
4) Fine-control the alignment between the original position and the position being
recorded as the lines are moved to the left side.
*
Turning the alignment adjusting screw may not immediately move the fixation unit.
Thus, it is advisable to move the unit while observing the move of the screw-fixed
portions at the top and bottom of the fixation unit on the right side plate.
(Above can be done easier by removing the screw and observing move of the screw hole.)
And the screw-fixed portion at the top of the fixation unit may sometimes not follow
that of the bottom portion. In such case, retry the operation after loosening the duct set
screws on the fixation unit.
* When the alignment adjustment alone is not enough for adjusting wrinkles or missed
print, adjust the heat roller speed. (Modify the default value by 10 or 20)
(See Section 2.3.12 Maintenance Code 12 "PARAMETER" (Parameter) Table 2-4
Engine Control Parameter List (3/4))
9-12
c) If horizontal lines of a smear are conspicuous across the full width a print sample
Increase the heat roller speed.
Modify the heat roller speed control parameter by +10 or +20 from the default value.
13cm
6 Repeat above adjustment and printing until the smear without registration becomes
inconspicuous on No.5 test print. Then check No.14 test print for irregularities of the lines
in a space 13 mm or so away from the rear end.
* Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with No.5. Thus, if further adjustment
is needed in spite of the adjustment made in No.5, adjust the heat roller speed. If the
speed adjustment doesnt solve the problem, readjust referencing the results of No.5
and No.14.
7 Tighten 2 fixation unit set screws.
8 Use A1 size for the adjustment.
As the adjustment with A0 size is completed, generate 3 copies of No.5 test print
consecutively in the same manner.
* Even when the smear was found on A1 size, first adjust with A0 size.
If a smear appears at any place or size on the print sample, modify the heat roller
speed control parameter by -10 or -20 from the default value.
* Adjustment of skew/sag is basically completed with A0 size. Thus, if further
adjustment was needed with A1 size, support it by adjusting the heat roller speed.
If the speed adjustment could not eliminate the problem, proceed to readjustment
referencing the results of A1 and A0 size.
9-13
9.4.3
Adjusting the Cut Squareness

1 Set the A0 roll paper (normal paper) in the roll 1 (upper drawer).
2 Enter the engine maintenance mode and output engine test pattern 15. (maintenance code
<10> "15," see Section 2.3.10.)
3 Measure the cut squareness. For measuring method and reference value, see "No. 7" in
Section 7.2.1.
4 If the standard value is met, remove the cutter cover and then loosen 2 screws on both side
and 1 screw at the center.
Cutter mounting sheet metal
5 While moving up and down the cutter mounting brackets (at a rough estimate), adjust the
cutter mounting height.
6 Tighten the screws to fix.
7 After repeating steps 2 through 6, adjust until the measured value satisfies the reference
value.
9-14
9.4.4
Adjusting the Cut Length Accuracy

Select the maintenance code <11>, subcode "04" in the maintenance mode if performing the
adjustment after the test print and measurement. See item (1) below.
Select maintenance code <12>, subcode "801 - 848" in the maintenance mode if the condition
and value to be adjusted are known in advance. See item (2) below.
This paragraph outlines adjustment procedures and explains supplementary operations. For
concrete operating procedures (LCD display and key operation) in the engine maintenance
mode, see "2.3.11 Maintenance Code <11> "REGULATE" (Adjustment)," "2.3.12
Maintenance Code <12> "PARAMETER" (Parameter)" or "2.3.13 Maintenance Code
<13> "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."
(1) When the cut length is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data are set to defaults.
1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select maintenance code <11>.
2 Select subcode "11< 04> Cut-Length."
3 Select the roll paper and print length test conditions.
Note:
For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use
default value as it is.
4 Output the print of subcode "04."

Three sheets are outputted continuously.
5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specification.
For the measuring method and reference value, see 7.2.1 No.6.
OK if within the specification.
- Repeat steps 3 and 4, when further making a check under other test conditions.
- Go to step 9 when finishing the test.
If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. Go to step 6.
6 To change the correction value, calculate the new value as shown in the example below.
Example 1: When the paper length is short. (The actual sheet length is 1182 mm although the
reference value, A0 = 11896 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value:
1182 - 1189 = - 7 mm
2. Calculate the number of print lines equivalent to the difference
(1 line = 0.0423 mm):- 7 0.04213 = -165.8 lines -165 lines
9-15
3. Check the value saved in NVRAM.

* The default is determined by the print length and roll paper specifications.
4. Calculate the correction value and enter the result:
300 lines - 165 lines = 135 lines
7 Output the test print of subcode "04." Three sheets are output continuously.
8 Measure the length of the third sheet and check whether the paper length meets the
requirement. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM.
(2) If the cut length is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known in
advance:
This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the cut length of plain
paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters.
2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number.
- Select the subcode suitable for the print length and roll paper conditions.
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into the number of lines to determine the correction
value. For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.
4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the cut length, repeat steps 2 and 3
above.
5 Save the correction value in NVRAM.
6 Execute the print with maintenance code <11> and subcode "04," and check the cut length
after adjustment.
- Check all codes with which the cut length was adjusted.
- Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment.
For the print executing method, see 2.3.11.
9-16
9.4.5
Adjusting the Plotting Length Accuracy

Select maintenance code <11>, subcode "03" in the maintenance mode if performing the
This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For
Hint:
The type and width of the paper used are A1 width of plain paper.
However, if the user's paper use condition is limited, the adjustment may be
performed under that condition.
(1) When the plotting length is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default. Only
the roll paper is subject to adjustment of print length. To adjust the A4 cut paper, follow the
procedures in item (2).
2 Select subcode "11<03> plotting -Length."
3 Select the roll paper to be used.
- The print length accuracy may be adjusted using either roll 1 or 2.
Note:
For the first test print, do not change the preset correction value, i.e. use
default value as it is.

Three sheets are outputted continuously. (print length: 1189 mm)
5 Measure the paper length of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specification.
Go to step 9, finishing the test.
If out of the specification, change the preset correction value and adjust. Go to step 6.
Example 1: When the plotting length is short. (The actual print length is 1122.8 mm although
the reference value is 1127.1 mm 0.5 %.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference
value:1122.8 - 1127.1 = -4.3 mm
9-17
2. Calculate the shift from the reference value in percentage

-4.3 1127.1 = -0.00382 (about 0.38 % short)
(Default = 1915 lines/sec)
4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to reference
value:
1915 (-0.00382) = -7.31 -7 lines/sec
1915 - 7 = 1908 lines/sec
Example 2: When the plotting length is long. (The actual print length is 1131.8 mm although
the reference value is 1127.1 mm - 0.5 %.)
1131.8 - 1127.1 = 4.7 mm
2. Calculate the shift from the standard in percentage:
4.7 1127.1 = -0.00417 (about 0.42 % long)
(Default = 1915 lines/sec)
4. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the to the print length to
reference value:
1915 0.00417 = 7.99 8 lines/sec
1915 + 8 = 1923 lines/sec
7 Output test print of subcode "03." Three sheets are output continuously.
8 Measure the plotting length of the third sheet and check whether it meets the requirement.
If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable, reexecute the
above procedures from Step 6.
(2) If the plotting length is adjusted when the value to be adjusted is known in advance
This adjustment will be effective, for instance, when the user requests the plotting length to be
reduced or extended by certain millimeters.
2 Enter the subcode (engine control parameter) number of the item to be adjusted.
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) into lines per second to determine the correction value.
For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.
5 Execute the print using maintenance code <11> and subcode "03," and check the plotting
length after adjustment.
9-18
9.4.6
Adjusting the Top Edge Registration

This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains, supplementary operations. For
(1) When the top edge registration is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default.
2 Select subcode "11<01> Front-Regist."
3 Select roll paper and print length test conditions.
Note:
For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default
value as it is.

5 Measure the top edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specifications.
If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust (Go to step 9.)
Example 1: When the top edge registration is short. (The actual top edge registration is 18.2
mm although the reference value is 21.7 3.0 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and reference value:
18.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm
2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of
seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s)
-3.5 80 = -0.04375 (sec)
This means the plotting starts 43.75 ms earlier.
9-19
3. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the registration to the reference

value (1 step = 1.0 msec).
43.75 1 = 43.75 44 (steps)
(Default = 400 steps*)
* The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications.
400 + 44 = 444 (steps)
Example 2: When the top edge registration is long. (The actual top edge registration is 25.7
mm although the reference value is 21.7 3.0 mm.)
25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm
2. Multiply the difference to the process speed to calculate the number of
seconds: (process speed = 80 mm/s)
4.0 80 = -0.05 (sec)
This means the plotting starts 55 msec later.
value (1 step = 2.0 msec).
50.0 1 = 50.0 50 (steps)
(Default = 400 steps*)
* The default is determined by the print length and paper specifications.
5. Calculate the increment/decrement to return the print length to the reference
value.
400 - 50 = 350 (steps)
7 Output the print of subcode "01." Three sheets are output continuously.
8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted check if it satisfies the
specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it in NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable,
reexecute the above procedures from Step 6.
(2) If the top edge registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are
known in advance:
This adjustment is effective, for instance, when the user requests the top edge registration of
plain paper A2 to be reduced or extended by certain millimeters.
1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code <12>.
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction
value. Enter that correction value. For the calculation method, see Step 6 of Paragraph
(1) above.
4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the top edge registration, repeat steps
2 and 3 above.
9-20

6 Perform maintenance code <11>, subcode <01> to print, check the top edge registration
after adjustment.
- Check all the subcodes where the top edge registration was adjusted.
- For the adjusted subcodes, match the test conditions and the print conditions.
For the print method, see Section 2.2.11. For measuring method and reference value, see
No. 3 in Section 7.2.1.
9.4.7
Adjusting the Center Registration

This paragraph outlines adjustment procedure and explains supplementary operations. For
(1) When the center registration is adjusted and measured after the test print:
This method is effective when the parts are replaced or the NVRAM data is set to default.
1 Enter the engine maintenance mode and select the maintenance code <11>.
2 Select the subcode "11<02> Center-Regist."
3 Select the roll paper to be used.
Note:
For the first test print, do not change preset correction value, i.e. use default
value as it is.

5 Measure the top edge registration of the sheet outputted third to check if it satisfies the
specifications.
If out of the specification, change preset correction value and adjust. Go to step 6.
9-21
Example 1: When the center registration is short. (The actual center registration is 25.2 mm
although the reference value is 21.7 3.0 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the reference value.
25.2 - 21.7 = -3.5 mm
2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.0508 mm).
-3.5 0.0508 = -6.9 pitches
This means the 6.9 pitch print position is
shifted rightward.
value (1 step = 1 pitches).
6.9 1 = 6.9 7 (steps)
(Default = 50 steps)
50 + 7 = 57 (steps)
Example 2: When the center registration is long. (The actual side registration is 25.7 mm
although the reference value is 21.7 3.0 mm.)
1. Obtain the difference between the measurement and the standard:
25.7 - 21.7 = 4.0 mm
2. Convert the difference to the number of dot pitches (1 pitch = 0.508 mm):
4.0 0.508 = 7.9 (pitches)
This means the 7.9 pitch print position is
shifted leftward.
value (1 step = 8 pitches):
7.9 1 = 7.9 8 (steps)
(Default = 50 steps)
50 - 8 = 42 (step)
8 Measure the lead edge registration of the third sheet outputted to check if it satisfies the
specifications. If the value is acceptable, save it to NVRAM. If it is still not acceptable,
reexecute the above procedures from Step 6.
(2) If the center registration is adjusted when the condition and value to be adjusted are known
in advance
This method is effective when the user requests you to shift the center registration of the roll 1 to
the left or right by a given amount.
9-22
3 Convert the adjustment value (mm) to the number of steps to determine the correction
value.
For the calculation method, see step 6 of Paragraph (1) above.
4 When you want to change the test conditions to adjust the center registration, repeat steps
2 and 3 above.
5 Save the correction value to NVRAM.
6 Execute the print with maintenance code <11> and subcode "03," and check the center
registration after adjustment.
- Check all codes with which the center registration was adjusted.
- Adjust the print condition to the test condition of the codes used for adjustment.
9-23
9.5
Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space
The device supports the following maximum plotting range:

The device has a dead space of 3 mm at the top edge of the paper.
When the user wants wider plotting range, the dead space can be reduced so that the image will
be printed as near to the edge as possible. To this end, perform the maintenance code <12>,
subcode "663" of engine maintenance mode of "Top Edge Clip Requirement."
Note:
If this adjustment is performed, explain the user that the possibility of paper
jam increases and get approval.
The dead space at the top edge of paper is provided as the clip amount to
separate the paper from the heat roller in the fusing process. Accordingly, if
this clip amount is narrowed, the possibility of paper jam increases
(particularly when high density data is plotted at the top edge of paper).
The preset value for the top edge clip amount adjustment does not become
effective unless the device is rebooted, thus requiring care.
2 Enter the subcode "663."
3 Convert the desired dead space (mm) into the number of lines.
Example:
To set the dead space to 1mm, conduct the following operation. (default: 71 lines
= 3.0 mm)
: Determine what number of lines is equivalent to 1 mm (1 line = 0.04233 mm)
and enter the result.
1 0.04233 = 23.62 24 (lines)
4 Save the value in NVRAM.

5 Turn off the device once and turn it on again to reboot the system.
6 Allow the computer to send the data whose top margin is minimum to the device and check
whether the plotting is printed correctly.
9-24
9.6
Adjusting the LED Head Joint
This section describes how to adjust the LED head joint. This process is needed after the LED
head is replaced with a new one.
(1) Configuration of LED head
The LED head is designed as illustrated below. Therefore, it is necessary to correct and adjust the
print shift at joints among heads.
LED head
Head C
Plotter
Head B
Head A
(2) Parameters
To adjust LED head joints, use the following parameters. (* Pay attention that the preset
parameter will not deviate from the allowable range.)
1 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "708" : Fine adjustment of joint between heads A and B
(setting range: 0 to 65)
2 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "709" : Fine adjustment of joint between heads C and B
(setting range: 0 to 65)
After the adjustment in the order of line with maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and
maintenance coded <12>, subcord "713," finely adjust the joint with this parameter. The
amount of 0.64 m is shifted against the adjustment value "1."
3 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "710": Start address used to write the data to each head
memory. To find the first print shift, temporarily specify "100." The shipping default is
fixed to "94."
4 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "711": Line adjustment parameter used between heads
A and B (setting range: 87 to 93)
9-25
5 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "712":
Line adjustment parameter used for head B

(fixed to 0)
6 Maintenance code <12>, subcord "713": Lin adjustment parameter used between heads
C and B (setting range: 87 to 93)
This parameter adjusts the shift in the order of line. The amount of 42.3 m is shifted
against the adjustment value "1." To find the first print shift, temporarily set both
maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "713" to 98.
Since maintenance code <12>, subcord "712" is a reference, or head B, the value must be
fixed to 0.
(3) Basic operation
Shown below are operations observed on the device when above parameters settings are
changed.
(a) Maintenance code <12>, subcord "708" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "709"
1 When decreasing set values:
Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.
Shifted
Shifted
* Image B does not move since it is reference.

2 When increasing set values:

Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as
reference.
Shifted
Shifted
C
B
9-26
(b) Maintenance code <12>, subcord "711" and maintenance code <12>, subcord "713"
1 When decreasing set values:
Images A and C move in the direction reverse to the paper feed direction with image B used as
reference.
Shifted
Shifted
C
B

2 When increasing set values:

Images A and C move in the paper feed direction with image B used as reference.
Shifted
Shifted

9-27
(4) Print pattern

Use pattern 7. Print out maintenance code <10>, subcode <07>.
(5) Adjustment method
(a) Check the adjustment positions.
Provide the following parameter settings and printed.
Maintenance code <12>, subcode "708": 0
With the above settings, the pattern is output with images shifted as shown below. Identify the
place of shift from this sample.
9-28
(b) Adjustment
Execute the test printing by setting the following parameters respectively. These values are set,
considering the distance 3.8 mm between A and B, and B and C of the LED head.
Maintenance code <12> subcode "708": 16
In the following settings, adjust according to how the printed image is shifted.
1 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B

Increase the setting values of both maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and maintenance
code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 m is shifted against the adjustment value
"1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the set values of both
maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and maintenance code <12> subcode "713."
If they are initially 90, decrease them to 89.
After the adjustment in the unit of line, fine adjustment is necessary. Thus, check the shift
direction and set the appropriate values to maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and
maintenance code <12> subcode "709."
9-29
2 If A and C are shifted in the paper feed direction on the basis of B

Decrease the setting values of both maintenance code <12> subcode "708" and maintenance
code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 m is shifted against the adjustment value "1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting values of
both maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and maintenance code <12> subcode "713."
If they are initially 90, decrease them to 91.
C
B
9-30
3 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction, C is shifted in the paper feed direction and
reverce direction on the basis of B
Increase the setting values of maintenance code <12> subcode "708." Decrease the setting
value of maintenance code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 m is shifted against
the adjustment value "1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, decrease the setting value of
maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and increase the set value of maintenance code <12>
subcode "713."
C
B
A
9-31
4 If A is shifted in the paper feed direction and reverce direction, C is shifted in the paper
feed direction on the basis of B
Decrease the setting values of maintenance code <12> subcode "708." Increase the set value
of maintenance code <12> subcode "709." (The amount of 0.64 m is shifted against the
adjustment value "1.")
If still shifted, the setting in the unit of line is necessary. Thus, increase the setting value of
maintenance code <12> subcode "711" and decrease the set value of maintenance code <12>
subcode "713."
A
B
C
(6) Judgment criteria

When lines are united in the scan direction on the test pattern 7, head joints are correctly adjusted.
Note that some lines may exceptionally be dislocated (terminated) due to jitter. If other lines are
united, the image is acceptable.
(7) Data storage

When the image is acceptable, save the data in the NVRAM. See Section "2.3.13 Maintenance
Code 13 "NVRAM" (NVRAM)."
9-32
Chapter 10
Operational Description
This chapter gives fundamental information to understand mechanical operations of this device,
as well as the information on the controller that performs data communications with the
computers.
10.1 through 10.8 describe the information concerning the engine:
10.1 Features
10.2 Engine Specifications
10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part
10.4 Fundamental Operation (Overall Operation)
10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation
10.6 Drive and Feed System Operation
10.7 Control System
10.8 Controller
10-1
10.1
Features
This device is an intelligent plotter that uses a magnetic one-component developing system plus
600 dpi wide LED head as a developer so that it can realize excellent printing quality and
quietness suitable for LAN environment.
Main features are as follows:
1 Easy operation-first user interface design
- All operations (paper feed, drawing output) are performed at the front.
- 2-drawer type roll paper feed
2 Lightweight, compact-size, and high cost-performance engine
3 Stabilized printing by use of a one-component developing system
10-2
10.2
Engine Specifications
1 Type: Floor type

2 Recording method
3
4
5
6
8
9
0
A
B
C
: Dry electrophotographic method

Photosensitive : OPC drum ( 60)
Charging
: Scorotron (negative charge applied, grid control)
Exposure
: LED (36 inches, 600 dpi)
Development
: One-component development
Transfer
: Corona transfer
Separation
: AC corona
Cleaning
: Blade cleaning
Fusing
: Heat roll fusing (halogen lamp)
Toner
: 9 magnetic one component (cartridge 500 g)
Recording density
: 600 600 dpi
Process speed
: 800 mm/sec
Process cartridge capability: about 5 km
Paper: Media
: Normal paper (high quality paper)/Recycled paper/
Tracing paper/Mat film
Paper feed
: 2-roll auto paper feed with cutter/A0, front paper feed
Paper ejection
: Faceup, front ejection, tray/bucket (OP)
Effective recording width : 926.48 mm (A0), guaranteed area inside 5 mm from top
and trail edges and 3 mm from both side edges
Long size printing
: 2.5 m (in use of A0 paper roll), or 10 m for L type
Print quality
: Density
: 1.0 or more
Density uniformity : 0.3 or less
Jam rate
: 1/3000 or less (normal paper)
MTBF
: 2000 h (not including consumable parts)
Weight
: 190 kg or less (main unit + photosensitive drum)
Power consumption
: 1350 W
Warming up time : within 4 minutes (at 23C)
Operating environment : Temperature ; 15 - 35C
Humidity
: 20 - 80%RH
Noise
: During operation : 61 dB or less
During standby
: 53 dB or less
Device life
: S model is 80 km and L model is 200 km
10-3
10.3
Paper Flow and Name of Each Part
A sectional view of the internal mechanism of the device is shown in Figure 10-1 to show the
paper flow and name of each part.
Process cartridge
D A B
5 6
6 LED head
B Charge eliminator is
not included.
4
1 Roll 1
2 Roll 2
0
H
9
3 Slitter cutter
I 4 Register roller
3 5 Primary charger
6 LED head
7 Developer
8 Developing sleeve
9 Transfer/separator
0 Finger
A Cleaner
B Charge eliminator
C Photosensitive drum
D Suction feeder
E Fixation
F Heat roller
G Backup roller
H Roller (manual feed 1)
I Roller (manual feed 2)
Figure 10-1 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part
10-4
10.4
Basic Operation (Overall Operation)
10.4.1 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration

This device consists of the four main blocks: paper feed and feed system; electrophoto process;
controller, and interface systems.
Electrophoto process system
Controller
Charge
elimination
Primary
charge
Exposure
(LED)
Cleaner
Drum
Development
Control panel
Engine
control
circuit
(board)
Data
controller
Raster controller
circuit
Transfer
separation
Fixation
Feed
system
Paper
ejector
External
equipment
Registration
Paper cutter
Roll paper
Interface circuit
Paper feed and
feed system
Roll paper
feed mechanism
Figure 10-2 Block Diagram - Basic Configuration
10-5
10.4.2 Overview of Device Configuration
OPERATION PANEL
BL03 R/C/L
BL02,BL06
INT1
MS08
MS06-1
GM01
LEDH
TH03
BM01
TH01
TH02
TH04
MS04
CC
TS02
EL
DEVELOPER
FUSER
CLEANER
MS05
DBD
DBA
DRUM
TS01
FL01
FL02
MS06-2
HM01
PS06
DC
CL04
TM01
REGIST
ROLLER
TC
PS07
PS05
INT3
BL06
BL01
PM01 PMFG
MS07
PS15
CL06
AC IN
BL05-1 to 3
CUTM
MRC2
HDD
MEC
LVPS
HV-PS
CUTTER
RE01/02
PF ROLLER 1
PS21
PS11
ROLL-1
PS30
PS31
PS32
PS04
FM01
PF ROLLER 2
PS22
PS12
ROLL-2
FM02
Figure 10-3 Overview of Device Configuration Drawing
10-6
Table 10-1 Symbol Table

Name
Develpment
Transfer
Separation
Charge
Charge elimination
Process motor
Developer pulse motor
Paper feed pulse motor
Heat roller pulse motor
Cutter motor
Registration roller clutch
Manual feed roller clutch
Suction fan
Fixation upper center blower
Charger blower
Fixation upper (both side fan)
Fixation halogen lamp 1
Fixation halogen lamp 2
SYMBOL
DP
TC
DC
CC
EL
PM01
GM01
TM01
HM01
FM01
FM02
CUTM
CL04
CL06
BL01
BL02
BL03 R/C/L
BL06
FL01
FL02
Paper detection sensor (for judgment of A0 width)

Paper detection sensor (lower cutter)
Paper detection sensor (register)
Paper detection sensor (suction)
Paper detection sensor (fuser)
Roll 1 (upper tray) flange detection sensor
Roll 2 (middle tray) flange detection sensor
Manual feed paper detection sensor
Roll 1 drawer open/close sensor
Roll 2 drawer open/close sensor
PS30
PS31
PS32
PS04
PS05
PS06
PS07
PS11
PS12
PS15
PS21
PS22
Toner door open/close switch

Waste toner bottle detection switch
Fixation device door open/close switch
Upper left door open/close switch
Upper door open/close interlock switch
Cutter door open/close interlock switch
Cutter blade (right end) detection micro switch
Cutter blade (left end) detection micro switch
MS04
MS05
MS06-1, MS06-2
MS08
INT1
INT3
RE01
RE02
Toner sensor
Waste toner sensor
TS01
TS02
Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (center)

Fixation overheat detection thermistor
LED head temperature measurement thermistor
Fixation temperature measurement thermistor (edge)
TH01
TH02
TH03
TH04
10-7
10.4.3 Configuration Block Diagram

The mechanical controller receives signals sent from external devices, and drives the LED head
and controls actuators to print operation. The controller also creates test patterns by means of the
internal board to print those sheets without signal input from external devices.
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
USB Parallel interface Ethernet interface
RIP
controller
Switches and
sensors
Blowers
Sensors
Clutch
Charge eliminator
Pulse motors
(TM01, FM01,
FM02)
Charger cleaning
motor
Cutter motor
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Motor driver
Engine
controller
Pulse motors
(GM01)
Primary charger
LED head
Developer
Transfer
Separator
High voltage
power unit
+5V
+24V
+24V
Heater
control
+5V
DC servo motor
(PM01)
+24V
Control panel
HDD
+12V
+24V
Low voltage power unit
AC100V
+5V
AC100V
Main power switch
Fusing heater
Figure 10-4 Configuration Block Diagram
10-8
Sub
power unit
+5V
10.4.4 Outline of Operations

(1) Warm-up operation
1 Section
- From heater ON until the fusing roller temperature reaches the specified temperature.
2 Purpose
- Warms the fusing roller up to the specified temperature.
3 Operation
- The process motor rotates to uniform the temperature of fusing roller.
- Paper detection operation (whether paper is present or not/size/head positioning) is
performed.
(2) Standby status
1 Section
- After the end of warm up until the print data reception finished.
- After the end of paper ejection until the next print data are received.
2 Purpose
- Controls the fusing roller to the specified temperature to retain the device in standby status.
3 Operation
- For the temperature control, the fuser temperature control thermistor is sampled to control
the heater activation. Also, the process motor rotates to uniform the surface temperature of
fusing roller.
(3) Pre-rotation
1 Section
- After the end of print data reception until the LED head writing (exposure) starts.
2 Purpose
- As the preparation for printing, eliminates residual charges on the photosensitive drum and
stabilizes the sensitivity of photosensitive drum.
3 Operation
- The drum starts to rotate by the drum motor and at the same time, the primary charger,
transfer corotron, and charge elimination are turned on, and in this state the drum rotates by
one or two turns. Also, after one turn, the developing bias turns on.
In addition, the main motor rotates to feed the paper up to the point before register roller.
(4) Printing
1 Section
- From start of LED head writing until the transfer finished.
2 Purpose
- Based on the print data transmitted from a computer, forms an image on the photosensitive
drum and transfers the toner image on the printing paper.
3 Operation
- After LED head writing, the separating corotron and the pre-transfer exposure turn on in
this order.
10-9
(5) Post-rotation
1 Section
- After transfer OFF until the main motor stops.
2 Purpose
- Removes residual toner and potential on the drum, and ejects the paper.
3 Operation
- After an image was transferred on the paper, the drum rotates by about one turn to stabilize
the drum surface.
10-10
10.5
Electrophotographic Process Operation
10.5.1 Primary Charging

As the first step for forming an electrostatic image, the primary charging process is provided to
charge the photosensitive drum surface uniformly.
This device uses the proven corona charging system (scorotron system excellent in negative
charging performance).
(1) Function of primary charger
1 Photosensitive drum surface potential applying function (corona discharge function +
discharge stabilizing function)
: Arranges the charges discharged from the charging wire by the grid electrode and applies
them to the photosensitive drum surface.
(2) General description of scorotron charging system

1 Principle
Corona discharge (negative corona)
: As the electrodes, a pointed conductor such as a needle and wire is used, and as the opposed
electrode, a flat plate is used, and then if the voltage applied between them is gradually
increased, a pointed part slightly sparks and the current of several micron ampere flows.
This phenomenon is called the corona discharge.
Negative corona
: If negative voltage is applied to the corona electrode wire (negative pole) and the voltage is
increased, the electric filed on negative pole surface increases, and electrons are emitted by
the field emission, which are the initial electrons. These electrons are accelerated in high
electric field and form the primary electron avalanche. Further, positive ions in the
avalanche flow into the negative pole and the secondary electrons are emitted, thus
generating the secondary avalanche. The avalanche continues in the same manner.
The electrons at the leading edge of these avalanches attach to the gas in the air and become
negative ions, and then they attach to the drum surface to charge.
Principle of scorotron charger
: The scorotron charger provides amplification effect by the principle of triode. This utilizes
the fact that the electrons move in the electric field, and it amplifies the entire charged
electric field. A salient electric field generated from the charged electric field flows into this
grid, but a large salient electric field does not propagate down to the drum from the grid.
Normally, the power supply is not connected to the grid electrode but the varistor (Zener
diode) is connected. The varistor is a semiconductor of which resistance value varies
according to the voltage, and it discharges when the voltage is high and does not discharge
when low.
2 Configuration
: A wire electrode as a conductor, and a shield electrode that covers the wire electrode are
arranged, and also a grid electrode is installed at the opening.
10-11
10.5.2 Photosensitive Drum

As an electrophotographic photosensitive material, this device uses the OPC (organic
photosensitive) material.
(1) Function of photosensitive drum
1 Charge retaining function
2 Electrostatic image holding function
3 Toner transfer function
(2) General description of OPC photosensitive drum
1 Principle
Carrier generation (optical exciter)
: In an organic molecular crystal, exciters are generated by the light exposure. These exciters
diffuse up to the crystal surface and lattice defects, and they interact with electrostatic
potential that exists there and push out electrons and positive holes.
As for the exciters, the exciting state from specific molecules in organic molecular crystal
run over the entire crystal as exciting waves to excite the entire crystal with the same phase.
At this time, the quantized exciting waves are called the exciters.
Ion pairs separated into electrons and positive holes are evaded from one-molecular
recombination and thermally dissociated, generating carriers of electrons and positive
holes. At this time, if no charges exist on the photosensitive surface, the Coulombs force
that separates the carriers does not work, allowing them to recombine each other.
Carrier transport
: In the non-crystal carrier transport layer, carriers move by hopping between molecules of
the carrier transport material.
The carriers are trapped if adjacent molecules have structural defects that take specific
orientation at close range.
2 Configuration
: Almost OPC photosensitive drums practically used at present are the layered type
consisting of the separated carrier generation and carrier transport which are fundamental
processes of photosensitivity.
3 Surface potential of photosensitive drum
- Charge
: -420 to -390 V -400 to -370 V (dark decay)
- Exposure
: -20 to -60 V
- Development
: -230 to -300 V (developing toner)
- Transfer
: -40 to -80 V
- AC separation : 0 AC 0 V Unstable positive and negative surface potential and
unstable charged toner remain.
10-12
10.5.3 Exposure
This device uses LED head for digital exposure process.
(1) Functions of LED head
1 Exposure function
: Irradiates light to the photosensitive drum to form a latent image.
2 Optical path length automatic correcting function
: Corrects the focal depth automatically (butt roller, etc.) if sufficient focal depth cannot be
ensured.
3 Head/machine internal temperature measuring function
: Thermistors are installed inside the head unit to measure the machine internal temperature
and the head temperature.
4 Line width adjusting function
: The line width can be changed by adjusting the light emitting time of LED.
(2) General description of LED head
LED array
1 Principle (light emitting principle)
: The Hall current applied to the LED array is blocked by the hetero barrier in the "pn"
junction (hetero junction), and the injection current flows toward there (recombination of
carriers), causing the light (hv) to be emitted.
SELFOC lens
1 Principle and manufacturing method
: The glass element wire is formed by the materials having the composition containing
graded index forming components such as Cs, Li, and Tl, and it is soaked in the fused salt
that contains calcium nitrate or kalium nitrate to form the refractive index by exchanging
the ions in glass that takes part in refractive index and the ions in the fused salt.
2 Configuration
: Many bar-shaped lenses called the SELFOC (optical converging glass fiber) lens are
arranged (SLA is the trademark of Nippon Sheet Glass Co., Ltd.).
3 Features
: Individual lenses have excellent resolving power and focus a uniform normal standing real
image in real size. However, in total their performance disperses and thus the performance
should be checked strictly.
As the 1:1 image is formed, the focus must be adjusted finely.
LED head unit
1 Principle
: This optical unit converges the light emitted from the LED array onto the photosensitive
surface by means of the SLA.
2 Configuration
: LED chip, IC, and board are subjected to the die bonding and wire bonding, and adjusted
and inspected, and then assembled with a heat sink, lens, etc.
10-13
10.5.4 Development
The development is a process in which the toner is put on an electrostatic image on the
photosensitive drum surface to make the image visible. When the toner charged in advance
touches the photosensitive drum, whether the toner attaches to the drum depends on the charging
status of the photosensitive surface.
To assist the toner attachment and to prevent the toner from attaching to the portions other than
the image, this device adds DC and AC biases.
(1) Functions of developer
1 Toner transfer (development)/bias adding function
: Transfers the toner to an electrostatic image on the photosensitive drum to make the image
visible. A thin film is formed for easy toner transfer.
2 Toner collecting function
: Adds AC bias to collect the toner not used for the development.
3 Toner supply function
: Supplies the toner from the toner cartridge.
Supplies the toner to the sleeve by means of the agitator.
4 Low toner detecting function
: Detects the toner empty state by the toner sensor (piezoelectric sensor).
5 Density adjusting function
: Adjusts the development density by varying the developing bias.
6 Toner agitating function
: Agitates the toner by rotating the agitator to prevent the soft block.
7 Development gap retaining function
: Retains the development gap by pushing the butt roller against the photosensitive drum.
(2) General description of magnetic one-component developing system
1 Principle
: The toner made of magnetic powders of 0.1 to 0.5 m in size that disperse in the resin
binder added with carbon black is transported by the developing sleeve around the
magnetic roll.
In general, the toner layer of 40 to 50 m in thickness is formed on the sleeve surface, and
when it is transported up to the photosensitive surface, the charge (AC+DC) is applied to
the toner, and when electrostatic attraction between the latent image and the toner becomes
larger than the magnetic binding force, the toner attaches to the latent image to develop.
2 Configuration
: The sleeve made of non-magnetic materials such as stainless steel and aluminum material
rotates in the forward direction relative to the photosensitive drum. Its rotating speed is one
to three times the surface speed of the photosensitive drum.
The magnetic roll is fixed in the sleeve so that it does not rotate, and six magnetic poles are
arranged where the main pole having the strongest magnetic force is arranged in opposition
to the photosensitive drum. This main pole is located at the rotational upstream side (1 - 5)
from a line connecting the center of sleeve and the center of photosensitive drum.
A rubber blade is forcibly pushed against the sleeve in the counter direction of the sleeve
rotation, and the toner is charged while its layer is thinned by being scraped by this rubber
blade. Also, AC+DC bias voltages are supplied to the sleeve to assist the toner movement
during the development.
10-14
10.5.5 Transfer
The transfer process (so-called electrostatic transfer) moves the toner attaching to the
electrostatic image which is developed on photosensitive drum by the Coulomb force to the final
support such as paper, acting against the Coulomb's force.
In the electrostatic transfer system, the charged toner of 5 to 15 m in particle diameter forms
one to three layers that attach to the electrostatic image on the photosensitive surface, and then
charges are given from the back of transfer paper to move the toner to the transfer paper by the
Coulomb's force in the electric field generated in relation to the photosensitive drum and to
retain the toner on the paper.
This device uses the previously proven corona transfer system.
(1) Functions of transfer unit
1 Paper charging function
: Performs the corona discharge from the back of paper to charge the paper so that the toner
is transferred to the paper.
2 Paper jam preventive function
: Prevents the leading edge of paper from entering the transfer unit along the paper guide,
resulting in paper jam.
(2) General description of corona transfer
1 Principle
: For the principle of discharge, see the primary charger.
In the state where the photosensitive drum is charged negatively and the toner in negative
pole is developed, to transfer this toner to the transfer paper, positive charges are supplied
from the back of transfer paper by the corona discharge.
The positive charges that reached the back of paper transfer the toner having negative
polarity to the paper and further induce negative charges in the photosensitive and the
photosensitive layer. At this time, the potential of the paper becomes several hundreds to
1,000V relative to the photosensitive substrate, causing the paper to be closely stuck to the
photosensitive drum. The intensity of electric field at this time reaches 100,000 V.
(Though the air withstands 30,000 V, when a gap is small, discharge does not occur
because of the Paschen's law.)
As the gap increases when the paper is separated, the potential of the paper increases and
the dielectric breakdown occurs following the Paschen's law, causing the discharge. As a
result, positive and negative charges remain at random on the photosensitive surface. At
this time, the toner sticking force to the paper is given by an electrostatic force and the Van
der Waals' force.
2 Configuration
: Though the configuration is similar to the primary charger, in many cases the transfer unit
is integrated with the AC separator. Also, the paper guide is provided to prevent the
separated paper from entering the unit. The transfer unit itself does not touch directly the
toner and the transfer paper, and thus no cleaning is required.
10-15
10.5.6 Separation
To separate the paper after transfer, a system that uses both general AC discharge separation and
finger separation is employed.
(1) Function of separator
1 Paper discharging function
: Eliminate charges from the paper and photosensitive drum.
(2) General description of AC discharge separation system
To separate the paper appropriately, the AC discharge separation system discharges the paper
after transfer using an AC charger and a discharge needle.
If the OPC photosensitive drum is used, the recording paper is positively charged by the transfer
charger and attracted to the photosensitive drum surface by electrostatic force. Accordingly, the
separating charger discharges AC corona to remove electrostatic attractive force between the
recording paper and the drum so as to separate the recording paper.
In general, thin paper having small stiffness may result in a separation failure, and therefore the
AC discharge voltage value and a range of permissible value must be determined from the image
quality and separation performance.
The separation guide prevents the print paper from entering the charger. Also, the separation
guide surface is coated with conductive paint so that the potential on the paper feed surface and
the recording paper becomes the same in order to prevent the toner from splashing.
10.5.7 Cleaning
If the toner is not transferred completely and remains or paper powder is present on the
photosensitive drum, it will obstruct the next process or enter the developer, causing a problem.
The cleaning process removes these residuals on the photosensitive surface.
This device uses a blade cleaning system that scrapes off the residuals mechanically.
(1) Functions of cleaning
1 Photosensitive drum surface residual toner removing function
: Using the blade, removes the toner and paper powder remaining on the photosensitive drum.
2 Photosensitive drum surface polishing function
: Pushes the blade against the drum to polish the photosensitive drum surface, so that the
deterioration of drum surface such as a filming can be prevented.
3 Waste toner transport function
: Transports waste toner by the auger screw.
4 Splash preventive function
: Prevents the toner from splashing by the toner receiver (film).
(2) General description of blade cleaning (blade cleaning method)
The abrasion resistant blade such as polyurethane scrapes off the residual toner on the drum
surface.
10-16
10.5.8 Charge Elimination

Residual potential on the photosensitive drum after transfer shows uneven value by the action
receiving from each process. Under this condition, if the next process is performed, an afterimage of the previous print may appear, and therefore residual potential on the photosensitive
drum must be uniform by the charge elimination before the primary charging.
This device uses the LED discharging system by means of the light.
(1) Function of charge elimination
1 Residual potential removing function
: Removes residual potential on the photosensitive drum surface by irradiating the light with
the LEDs.
(2) General description of LED charge elimination

In general, red LEDs are used. To adjust the LED light emitting quantity to the drum sensitivity,
the number of LEDs and LED driving voltage must be controlled by PWM.
Emitting the discharging light at the drum while performing the charging (primary charging),
check whether the drum charged voltage is stable to determine the LED light quantity.
10.5.9 Fusing
The fusing fixes the toner on the paper.
This device uses already proven thermal fusing (heat roll) from the viewpoint of image quality
and fixation.
(1) Functions of fuser

1 Heating function
: Heats the aluminum heat roller by using a halogen lamp.
2 Temperature detection and control function
: Temperature detection range
160C - 190C
(Type: Temperature detection by thermistor,
heater ON/OFF)
Overheat detection
200C (Type: Thermistor)
Overheat prevention
Overheat prevention by thermal fuse
3 Power saving function
4 Paper feed function
5 Paper compression/nip release function
: Releases the nip of fusing rollers by interlocking with the fuser unit opening/closing.
6 Cooling air flow
: Exhausts the air on the sides of the device using the blowers.
7 Offset prevention
: Prevents the toner offset by using a Teflon roller.
8 High temperature protective function
10-17
(2) General description of heat roll fusing system

1 Principle
: The toner fixation is attained through five processes of 1) toner particles are semi-fused by
the heat, 2) combined, 3) deformed (spread) to wet the paper, 4) the fused toner penetrates
(anchors) between the paper fibers, and 5) solidifies by being cooled to adhere to the paper.
The main component of toner, polymer resin, changes its state from glass to rubber and then
viscous fluid through glass transition state according to the temperature change.
2 Configuration
: The upper heat roll heats the aluminum metallic core from the inside using a halogen lamp
heater. Also, the metallic core surface is coated with the resin such as Teflon to improve the
parting performance in relation to the toner. The lower backup (pressure) roll made from a
metallic core coated with thermosetting silicone rubber excellent in oil resistance, weather
resistance, and compression restorable performance is pushed against the upper heat roll to
ensure the nip width.
10-18
10.6
Operation of Drive and Feed Systems
10.6.1 Drive System

The drive system of this device consists of a paper feed drive motor, cutter upper roller drive
motor, process drive motor, and fuser drive motor. The developer and cutter drive motors are also
installed and these motors can be operated individually.
(1) Process drive motor
This motor drives the register roller, drum, cleaner auger, and manual feed roller. The register
roller and the manual feed roller are equipped with the drive force transmission clutch, so that the
paper feed drive can be turned on or off according to the operational requirements.
(2) Cutter upper roller drive motor
This motor drives the cutter upper roller.
(3) Paper feed motor
This motor feeds or rewinds the rolled paper.
(4) Developer drive
The developer is driven by the developer motor (GM01) installed on the developer. As a drive
motor, the stepping motor is used to drive the agitator and the sleeve through the gear
transmission.
(5) Fixation drive motor
The fuser is driven by the fuser motor installed on the fuser. As a drive motor, the stepping motor
is used to drive the heat roller and the backup roller through the gear transmission.
10.6.2 Paper feed system

(1) Paper feed unit
1 Structure of paper feed unit
: The paper feed unit is composed of the two drawers arranged vertically where paper rolls
can be fed respectively.
10-19
2 Paper feed/print operation

First print
: The first sheet (immediately after powering on, or first sheet of intermittent print) needs the
pre-rotation of the photosensitive drum, and therefore the print does not start for about 7.4
seconds (pre-rotation time) after the print request is made from the controller until the
exposure starts.
Intermittent print (paper switching print)
: The paper switching operation is inserted if the paper size is different between the first data
and the next data.
Continuous print (copy)
: In a continuous print (copy), the leading edge of the next paper is gripped by the register
roller before the paper of the first data printing is ejected to shorten the printing interval.
Continuous print (if there is a spool and the controller processing is in time)
: Despite different data, if the paper size is the same and the controller processing is in time,
the print is possible at the similar print interval to that of copy print.
(2) Cutter
The paper is cut by a slitter type cutter. At the time of cutting, the buffer is given to the paper in
advance to prevent the image quality from being reduced due to a change of paper movement.
The paper cutting time is about one second and the paper buffer is given for about one second (80
mm).
(3) Suction unit
The suction unit feeds the paper by means of belts while sucking the paper by fans in order not to
disturb unfixed toner image transferred to the paper.
This device uses a system that transports the paper while sucking the entire surface of the paper
by sirocco fans. The exhaust air is led to the sides of the device.
The drive force of suction belts is supplied from the process motor via the gears.
(4) Paper unfeed unit
The paper unfeed unit is part of the fuse unit and it is driven by the same drive system as that of
the fuse roller.
The paper unfeed roller rotates at high speed relative to the fuse roller so that it applies tension to
the paper fed from the fuser. This tension is required to prevent a wrinkle of the paper.
At the paper ejection outlet, a bucket or stacker can be installed as an option.
(5) Register roller
The register roller made of a metallic shaft having a concave-convex surface provides the largest
paper transport force among all paper feed rollers to ensure the paper feed accuracy.
10-20
10.7
Control System
10.7.1 Process Control

(1) Drum surface potential control
As the scorotron charge system is used as a charge system, fundamentally the drum surface
potential is not controlled.
(2) LED head write control
The LED head write timing is controlled on the basis of pulse signals from the engine control
board. By adjusting finely this base pulse signals, the print timing is varied and the print accuracy
can be adjusted.
(3) Development density control
The development density is determined from correlation of a difference between the dark
potential and the light potential of the photosensitive drum and a development bias (DC). Here, it
is hard to control a difference between the dark potential and the light potential, but the
development density control of this device controls the line width change by controlling the LED
head light emitting time (STB width) and controls the development bias.
(4) Fuse roller temperature control
The fuse roller temperature is controlled within the set temperature range by controlling the on/
off of the fuser lamp based on the temperature value detected by the thermistor.
The fuser lamp turns on when the temperature dropped below the preset value on the low
temperature side, or it turns off when the temperature reached the preset value on the high
temperature side.
10.7.2 Paper Feed Control

As for the paper feed control, the feed amount of the main motor is controlled by controlling the
paper cut timing.
To control the paper feed speed, the motor rotation speed is controlled as mentioned in the motor
section.
10-21
10.8
Controller
10.8.1 Description of Controller Specifications

1 Data format
: HP-GL, HP-GL/2, HP RTL, TIFF, CALS
2 Setup function
: SETUP, DEVICE, PAPER, FUNCTION, PROTOCOL, RESET, SYSTEM
3 Memory configuration (see the table below)
System
configuration
Memory
configuration
System
operation
Spool
Page memory
Standard
256MB
84MB
12M
160M Equivalent to 2.5 m
Equipped with HDD
256MB
96MB
2G
160M Equivalent to 2.5 m*
* L model allows long printing up to 10 m.
4 Input interface
: Ethernet interface (ftp/xpt/lpr)
- 100Base-TX and 10Base-TX are supported.
(Half/full duplex)
: USB interface (port B)
- USB2.0 is supported (HI SPEED / FULL SPEED)
: Parallel interface (conforming to IEEE1284 (compatibility mode))
- IEEE1284 (conforming to compatibility mode)
- Maximum cable length: 10 m
10-22
10.8.2 Hardware Configuration

Figure 10-5 shows the overall hardware block diagram.
PCB-MRC2
+5V
+3.3V, +2.5V
Power
Supply
BOOT ROM
(1 MB)
+3.0V, +1.2V
CPU_VCORE
RTC, PIO
CPU
MPC8245
400MHz
Flash memory
(16 MB)
SO_DIMM
(256MB)
PCI BUS
Debug Slot
Option Slot
CF card
controller
PCB-USB2
Engine interface &

Scanner interface &
Panel controller
LAN
controller
PCI-PCI
bridge
CF card
Centronics
controller
USB
controller
Centro
interface
USB I/F
Scanner interface Engine interface 10/100Base-Tx
HDD
controller
3.5-inch
HDD
Figure 10-5 Controller Block Diagram
10-23
10.8.3 Data Processing Flowchart

The flowchart in Figure 10-6 shows how the data sent from the computer is processed in the
device.
Computer
Communication driver
Communication driver:
- Sends the received data to the spool driver.
- Processes the protocol control command sent from the computer.
Spool driver
Spool driver:
- Opens the memory when receiving the data from the communication
driver.
Spool memory
Spool memory:
- Stores the received data.
PDL:
PDL
- A process controlled under the OS. After the main data judgment block
judges the received data, the PDL connected to the resulted data format
works.
- Reads the received data from the spool memory, analyzes the read
data, and pastes the raster data to the page memory.
- Requests printout to the engine driver.
- Plots drawings only in response to the data print command.
Page (raster) memory:
Page (raster) memory
- Saves the date processed with the PDL.
Engine driver:
Engine driver
- Receives the print request from the PDL and commands the engine to
start printing.
Engine
Figure 10-6 Data Processing Flowchart
10-24
SW3
ON
ON
1
1 2
SW4
LED
SW2 (both bits must be ON)
Appendix A describes how to set the DIP switches and how to see the LED indication on the
MEC board.
A.1
Setting the DIP Switches
A.1.1
Setting 8-bit DIP Switch on MEC Board (SW4)

The setting of the DIP switch (DIP SW) on the MEC board is listed below.
If the DIP switch setting is changed, reboot the power.
DIPSW-5 is normally set to OFF, and set to ON only when the console is used.
Bit
Meaning of ON position
Meaning of OFF position
Normal
position
DIPSW-1
OFF
DIPSW-2
OFF
DIPSW-3
OFF
DIPSW-4
OFF
DIPSW-5
Console is used
Console is not used
OFF
DIPSW-6
OFF
DIPSW-7
OFF
DIPSW-8
Long size (10 m) LP-1010L
Standard (2.5 m) LP-1010
(All bits must be set to normal position when the machine is delivered)
A-1
A.1.2
Setting DIP Switch SW2 on MEC Board
O
F
F
For setting DIP switch SW2, both bits must be set to ON position.
A.1.3
Setting DIP Switch SW3 on MEC Board
Bit2
Bit3
Bit4
Rev. A
ON
ON
ON
ON
Rev. B
OFF
ON
ON
ON
Rev. C
ON
OFF
ON
ON
Rev. D
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
Bit1
O
F
F
For setting DIP switch SW3, the revisions of the MEC board have already been set.
A-2
A.2
LED Indication
The following shows how to see the LED indication on the MEC board.
The LED ON/Flashing/OFF are expressed as follows:
: ON
: Flashing
: OFF
: Indeterminate
_ : Don't care
A.2.1
LED indication on MEC board
(1) LED indication immediately after powering on

The LED immediately after powering on indicates that the power on check is in progress or that
an error was detected during check.
At the start of check, the corresponding LED turns on, and at successful termination of check, the
corresponding LED of the next check item turns on.
If an error is detected, the corresponding LED of the check item continues flashing.
Step
Check item
Corresponding LED
LED indication in
normal state
LED indication at
error detection
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Engine firmware operation

start
LED8
Program checksum in flash

memory (or IC card)
LED7
CPU built-in RAM read/write

check
LED6 and LED7
Board matching check
LED5 and LED8
SRAM read/write check
LED6
NVRAM presence check
LED5
Program copy to SRAM
LED5 and LED7
(Go to (2), (3), or (4))
A-3
(2) LED indication in usual operation

Upon successful termination of the check at powering on, the indication of respective LED is as
follows:
LED1 and LED2
LED3
LED4 - LED7
LED8
LED
: Ongoing task ID
: (Indeterminate because of use for firmware debugging)
: Engine status
: Presence of print request
LED indication
Description of function
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
LED1 and LED2
_________
LED3
____ _________
Indicate the low-order two bits of ongoing task ID.

LEDs are flashing when the task is switched
normally.
(Reserved)
Used for debugging. Applications not specified.
Indicate the engine status.
LED4 and LED7
(LED4/5/6/7 all OFF)

____ __
Power saving
____ __
Warming up
____ __
Standby status
____ __
Printing
____ __
(LED5 ON, LED4/6/7 OFF)

Recoverable error occurring
____ __
(LED4/5 ON, LED6/7 OFF)

Unrecoverable error occurring
(LED6/7 ON, LED4/5 OFF)
____ __
LED8
A-4

Initialized state (clock input mode)
NVRAM is not initialized.
Indicates whether the print request is present or not.
_____________
Turns on when the print request is accepted, and turns

off when the requested print finished.
_____________
Turns off when no print request is present.
(3) LED indication in case of other errors

Flashing of LED4 to LED8 indicates the following errors.
LED indication
Description of error
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
_____
Unexpected interruption occurred.
_____
NMI interruption occurred.
_____
Interruption nest under error
_____
Interruption nest over error
(4) LED indication when power is turned off

When the main power switch is turned off, the circuit interrupts the firmware.
After that, for more than 10 msec, the 5 V power supply is retained for CPU operation and the
firmware can operate.
The firmware accepts this interruption, saves the system parameters such as total print distance in
the NVRAM within 10 msec, and also turns on the LED4/5/6/7/8.
Afterwards, the 5 V power supply shuts down and all LEDs turn off.
LED indication
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
______
Description of firmware processing

Interruption occurs when the power is turned off.
The saving of information such as total print distance in NVRAM finished.
If LED4 through LED8 do not turn on when the main power switch is turned off, the interruption
from the circuit failed, or saving of system parameters in NVRAM has not finished yet.
In this case, "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error will occur when the power
is turned on next time.
A-5
A.3
Reset Switch (SW1) on MEC Board
Pressing the reset switch SW1 causes the circuits of MEC board to be reset, and also the firmware
to be reset (restart).
However, unlike powering off and on operation, the system parameters such as total print
distance are not saved and therefore do not use this switch usually.
Using the switch causes "2033: Interruption does not occur at powering off" error.
Instead, turn off and then on the power switch.
A-6
Appendix B Setup RFU Board
Appendix B RFU Board Setup
SW1
1 4
A DIP switch is mounted on the RFU board. This appendix describes how to set up this switch.
Setup of DIP Switch
DIP Switch on the RFU Board
Set DIP switch SW1 according to the roll paper configuration of the roll paper feed unit.
B.1.1
O
F
F
B.1
Bit
Meaning of ON (up) position
Meaning of OFF (down) position
Roll 1 is loaded.
Roll 1 is not loaded.
Roll 2 is loaded.
Roll 3 is loaded.
Paper feed mechanism specifically

used for roll flanges (S)
Paper feed mechanism specifically

used for roll flanges (L).
B-1
Appendix C Setup MRC2 Board
Appendix C MRC2 Board Setup
SW7
SW1
SW3
SW2
The following describes the setting of DIP switches on the MRC2 board.
C.1
Setup of DIP Switches
C.1.1
DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW7)
O
F
F
For setting DIP switch SW7, the revisions of the MRC2 board have been set.
Bit1
OFF
Bit2
OFF
Bit3
OFF
Bit4
OFF
Rev.B
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
Rev.C
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
Rev.D
ON
ON
OFF
OFF
DIP Switch on MRC2 Board (SW2)
For setting DIP switch SW2, all bits are set to OFF position.
O
F
F
C.1.2
Rev.A
C-1
C.1.3
DIP Switch (SW3) on MRC2 Board

See "Table 1-2 Other version up list" in "1.5.3 Other Version Up."
C.1.4
DIP Switch (SW1) on MRC2 Board

For setting DIP switch SW1, the CPU clock mounted on the MRC2 board has been set.
The setting of this switch is fixed, therefore do not change it.
6 5 4 3 2 1
ON
Bit6
OFF
C-2
Bit5
OFF
Bit4
OFF
Bit3
ON
Bit2
ON
Bit1
OFF
This appendix describes the menu structure of the device. It also includes specific menus for
maintenance people that they can select on the control panel.
D-1
Menu Structure
This section describes how to read the menu structure using "SYSTEM - # PARA" menu on
page D-14 as an example.
Menu hierarchy
# Para
Shipping default
: The parameter indicated
beneath the menu shows a
shipping default.
# OPERATION MODE
> NORMAL
# ACK ON TIME (30 ns)
> 80
# ACK PULSE (30 ns)
> 80
# BUSY OFF TIMING
> ACK RISING EDGE
Menu specialized for maintenance people

: The item connected with broken lines (---)
shows the menu from which only the
maintenance people can enter the
maintenance person mode to conduct
various operations.
D-2
# SELECT SIGNAL
> ON
# AF SIGNAL REPORT
> INPUT
# TIME OUT
> 30 sec
Hint:
For the information on how to select individual menus, as well as useraccessible menu functions, refer to the User's Guide.
Note:
The DSCAN format listed in the menu structure are for only customers in
Japan.
SETUP MENU
Note (1) DSCAN only
ME NU
# SETUP
Note (2) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only

Note (3) Double or triple rolls model only
Note (4) A is displayed in the case of DSCAN.
SETUP
#PORTn_HPGL
#PARAMETER MODE (1)

>DATA FIRST
PAPER SERIES (2)
>A
SETUP
#PORTn_DSCAN
SETUP
#PORTn_TIFF
#AUTO SUPPLY
>CONT MODE
SETUP
#PORTn_CALS
SETUP
#PARA_HPGL
SETUP
#PARA_DSCAN
#FIXSIZE MODE
>FIXD SIZE
SETUP
#PARA_TIFF
#COPY COUNT
>1
SETUP
#PARA_CALS
#SUPPLY PARAM.
SETUP
#USB_HPGL
*DATA FIRST
*PANEL FIRST
*A
*9"
*8.5"
*30 42
*MAP
*DIN
*CHINA
*CONT MODE
*OPTIMAL MODE
*ROLL 1 MODE
*ROLL 2 MODE (3)
*ROLL 3 MODE (3)
*MANUAL FEED
*FIXED SIZE (4)
*EXTENSION A
*REAL SCALE
*1 to 99
#CENTERING
>OFF
#PAPER TYPE
>NON-DESIGNATED
#SIZE MARGIN (mm)

>2
*OFF
*ON
*NON-DESIGNATED
*NORMAL PAPER
*TRACING PAPER
*FILM
*0 to 30
D-3
Note (5) TIFF, CALS only

Note (6) HP-GL only.
A
#DRAWING PARAM.
#OFFSET MODE
>MARGIN
#MARGIN (mm)
>0
#X-OFFSET (mm)
>0
#Y-OFFSET (mm)
>0
#WRITE MODE
>OR WRITING
#MIRROR
>OFF
#REVERSE (5)
>OFF
#ERROR MEMO
>ON
#SCALE MODE
>MANUAL SCALE
#SCALING PARAM.
D-4
B'
*0 to 100
*-9999.99
to 9999.99
*-9999.99
to 9999.99
*OR WRITING
*OVER WRITING
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*ON
*SPECIAL (6)
*OFF
*MANUAL SCALE
*REDUCE
#SCALE X (%)
>100.00
*0.01 to 100.00
#SCALE Y (%)
>100.00
*0.01 to 100.00
#PEN WIDTH SCALE

>ON
*MARGIN
*VARIABLE SIZE
*FIXED SIZE
*ON
*OFF
Note (7) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.
B'
#A4
>A4
#FIX SCALE A
#A3
>A3
#A2
>A2
#A1
>A1
#A0
>A0
#FIX SCALE 9" (7)
#A
>A
#B
>B
C'
*A4
*A3
*A2
*A1
*A0
*A3
*A2
*A1
*A0
*A4
*A2
*A1
*A0
*A4
*A3
*A1
*A0
*A4
*A3
*A2
*A0
*A4
*A3
*A2
*A1
*A
*B
*C
*D
*E
*B
*C
*D
*E
*A
C"
D-5
Note (7) HP-GL, TIFF, CALS only.
C"
C'
#C
>C
#D
>D
#E
>E
#FIX SCALE 8.5" (7)
#A
>A
#B
>B
#C
>C
#D
>D
D-6
D"
*C
*D
*E
*A
*B
*D
*E
*A
*B
*C
*E
*A
*B
*C
*D
*A
*B
*C
*D
*E
*B
*C
*D
*E
*A
*C
*D
*E
*A
*B
*D
*E
*A
*B
*C
Note (8) HP-GL, DSCAN only
Note (9) HP-GL only.

Note (10) When the custom (PLOT
D"
POINT) of the system

custom is ON
#E
>E
HP-GL only.
#FORMAT PARM. (8)
#PRT DRIVER (9)

>ENABLE
#GRAPHIC LANG. (9)

>AUTO
#TERMINATOR (9)
*ENABLE
*DISABLE
*CHINA
*AUTO
*HP-GL
*HP-GL/2
#PG1;
>ON
#NR;
>ON
#SP0;
>ON
#ESC.)
>ON
#AF;
>ON
#AH;
>ON
#FR;
>ON
#PLAN SIZE (9)

>ON (PS)
#PLOT POINT (10)

>ON( PS)
E'
*E
*A
*B
*C
*D
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON(PS)
*ON(IP)
*ON(IW)
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
D-7
E'
#DRAWING (11)
>NOP
#PAPER NO. (11)
>PAPER SOURCE
#PEN PARAMETER (12)
#PEN PAR.MODE
>DATA PRIORITY
*NOP
*EOP
*PAPER SOURCE
*PAPER TYPE
*OFF
*DATE PRIORITY
*PANEL PRIORITY
#WIDTH (mm)
>n
*0.00 to 16.00
#PEN0
to
N (13)
#DENSITY (%)
>n
*0 to 100
#CORNER
>ROUND
#JOINT
>ROUND
#PEN ADJUST (mm)
>-0.00
#LINE DISPOSAL
>OFF
#RASTER PARAM
#IMAGE SCALE
>LINE DRAW.MODE
#SCREENING (14)
>LINE DRAW.MODE
*ROUND
*BUTT
*ROUND
*MITERED
*-0.99 to 0.99
*OFF
*ON
*LINE DRAW.MODE
*PICTURE MODE
*LINE DRAW.MODE
*GRAPHICS MODE
*PICTURE MODE
Note (11) DSCAN only

Note (12) HP-GL,DSCAN only
Note (13) HP-GL is 0 to 15 DSCAN is
1 to 32
Note (14) HP-GL,DSCAN,TIFF only.
D-8
DEVICE MENU
MENU
#DEV I CE .
#POWER SAVE EFCT

*HIGH
>HIGH
*LOW
#POWER SAVE
>15min
#EDGE CUT TIMER

>OFF
#DOOR OPEN CUT

>OFF
#DENSITY
>NORMAL
#TRACE MODE
>NORMAL
#BOTTLE MAINT.
>AUTO
#SPECIAL SET2
>00
#SPECIAL SET3
>OFF
*OFF
*15min
*30min
*60min
*90min
*OFF
*30min
*1hour
*2hour
*4hour
*1min
*5min
*10min
*OFF
*ON
*THIN
*RATHER THIN
*NORMAL
*RATHER THICK
*THICK
*NORMAL
*WETTY
*AUTO
*MANUAL
*00 to FF
*OFF
*ON
D-9
MENU
# PAPER .
PAPER
>ROLLn
#PAPER KIND
>NORMAL
#PAPER SERIES
>A
D-10
*NORMAL
*TRACE
*FILM
*A
*9"
*8.5"
*30x42
*MAP
*DIN
*CHINA
FUNCTION MENU
MENU
# F UNC T I ON .
#MENU PRINT
>SYSTEM
#HPGL SELF PLOT

>PORT1
#DSAN SELF PLOT

>PORT1
#ERROR LOG
>PAGE COUNT 1
*SYSTEM
*PORTn
*PARA
*USB
*ALL
*PORTn
*PARA
*USB
*PORTn
*PARA
*PAGE COUNT 1
*PAGE COUNT 5
#JOB LOG
>PAGE COUNT 1
*PAGE COUNT 1
*PAGE COUNT 5
#ENGINE LOG
>OK?
#SYSTEM DATE
>aa:bb:cc
#SYSTEM TIME
>aa:bb:cc
# FORMAT HDD
>OK?
# FORMAT NVRAM
>OK?
#VERSION UP
>lp1010.img Note (1)
#INIT CHARG.INF
>OK?
Note(1): Applicable choices vary depending on the

contents of the CF card specialized for
maintenance person's.
#PRINT CHARG.INF
>OK?
#MAINTE INFO
>FAX PRINT
#DATE DUMP
>OK?
D-11
MENU
# PROTOCO L .
PROTOCOL
#PORT1: XPT
#PDL SELECT
>HDTC
#XPT PORT
>9100
PROTOCOL
#PORT2:LPD
#PDL SELECT
>HDTC
#PRINTER NAME
>LP02
#PDL SELECT
>HDTC
PROTOCOL
#PORT3:FTP
PROTOCOL
#PARALLEL
D-12
#USER NAME
>FTP03
#PDL SELECT
>HDTC
RESET MENU
ME NU
#RESET .
#SYSTEM RESET
>
#PORT RESET
>PORT1
D-13
SYSTEM MENU
MENU
# S Y S T EM .
SYSTEM
#COMM.PARAM
COMM.PARAM
#ETHERNET
COMM.PARAM
#PARALLEL
H
#TIMING MODE
>NORMAL
*NORMAL
*FAST
*SLOW
*MANUAL
#ACK ONTIME (30ns)

>80
1 to 127
#ACK PULSE (30ns)

>80
1 to 127
#BUSY OFF TIMING

> ACK RISING EDGE
#SELECTSIGNAL
>ON
* ACK RISING EDGE

* ACK RISING EDGE
*ON
*OFF/ON
#AF SIGNAL DIRECTION

*INPUT
>INPUT
*OUTPUT
#TIME OUT (100msec)
*1 to 18000
>300
COMM.PARAM
#USB
#WEB LOCK
>OFF
SYSTEM
#ENABLE SERIES
*OFF
*ON
#A
>ON
#9"
>OFF
#8.5"
>OFF
#3042
>OFF
#MAP
>OFF
#DIN
>OFF
D-14
#CHINA
>ON
#TIME OUT (sec)

>10
#CHANGE INTERFACE
>OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*0 to 99
*OFF
*ON
SYSTEM
#APPLY ROLL
APPLY ROLL
#A SERIES
#USE A0
>ON
#USE A1
>ON
#USE A2
>OFF
#USE A3
>ON
APPLY ROLL
#9" SERIES
#USE 36"
>ON
#USE 24"
>OFF
#USE 18"
>OFF
#USE 12"
>OFF
APPLY ROLL
#8.5" SERIES
#USE 34"
>ON
#USE 22"
>OFF
#USE 17"
>OFF
#USE 11"
>OFF
APPLY ROLL
#3042 SERIES
#USE 30"
>ON
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
G'
D-15
G'
APPLY ROLL
#MAP SERIES
#USE B1-MAP
>ON
#USE B2-MAP
>OFF
APPLY ROLL
#DIN SERIES
#USE B1-DIN
>ON
#USE B2-DIN
>OFF
APPLY ROLL
#CHINA SERIES
#USE CHINA A0
>ON
#USE CHINA A1
>OFF
#USE CHINA A2
>OFF
SYSTEM
#CHINA SIZE
#USE CHINA A3
>OFF
#CHINA A0
>914mm
#CHINA A1
>620mm
#CHINA A2
>450mm
#CHINA A3
>310mm
#INITIAL SET
>STANDARD
*914mm
*910mm
*900mm
*880mm
*620mm
*610mm
*450mm
*440mm
*310mm
*STANDARD
*CHINA
#FACTORY SET
>
OK
#LANGUAGE
>JAPANESE
*JAPANESE
*ENGLISH
#SERIAL NUMBER
>00000 to 65535
#SYSTEM CUSTOM
>
D-16
CUSTOM (PLOT POINT)

>OFF
*OFF
*ON
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
*ON
*OFF
#PORT SELECT 1-10

>XLF------------
*X
*L
*F
*-
#DHCP
>DISABLE
*DISABLE
*ENABLE
#IP ADDRESS
>000.000.000.000
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#SUBNET MASK
>000.000.000.000
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#GATEWAY ADDR01
>000.000.000.000
#ROUTING TABLE
#NETWORK ADDR01
>000.000.000.000
#ROUTING TABLE2
#SETUP DETAILS
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#GATEWAY ADDR02
>000.000.000.000
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR02
>000.000.000.000
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
to
#GATEWAY ADDR10
*000.000.000.000
>000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#NETWORK ADDR10
*000.000.000.000
>000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
#METRIC
>064
*1 to 255
#ETHERNET ADDR
>0800832Annnn
#CONNECTION SPD.
>AUTO
*AUTO
*100
*10
D-17
I
#CONNECTION TYPE
>AUTO
*AUTO
*FULL
*HALF
#HTTP PORT
>00080
*0 to 65535
#PORT TIME OUT
>30min
#FTP DATE TYPE

>ASCII/BIN
#SNMP
>OFF
#SNMP VERSION
>V1
#TRAPnn
*OFF
*5min
*10min
*15min
*30min
*ASCII/BIN
*BIN
*OFF
*ON
*V1
*V2
#MANEGER
>000.000.000.000
#ERROR
>ON
#JOB
>OFF
#IP ADDR
>000.000.000.000
#PORT
>ALL
#SNMP TRAP NUM.

>2
D-18
*1 to 20
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
*ON
*OFF
*OFF
*ON (IP ADDR)
*ON (PORT)
*000.000.000.000
to *255.255.255.255
*ALL
*PORT01 to 10
This appendix shows electrical connection diagrams of the device.
E-1
E-2
[Note]
For the harnesses for which the UL No.
is not specified, use the following:
UL1007 (crimped connector)
Box (electric)
Male
[Symbol]
Female
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
: Low voltage power unit - [1/4]
Crimped terminal
Flat terminal
LVPS (PSU-LSP(S)
: Low voltage power unit (for HDD)
Disconnected
L1: Inductor (AC100V)

Inductor (AC220/230V)
Crimped connector
SW01:
Main power switch
LVPS (PSU-LSP): Low voltage power unit 1
3.5' HDD
: Option unit - [1/2]
FL02: Halogen lamp (600W)
HTR2- ASSY (side)
Electrical connection diagram
Fuser unit
FL01: Halogen lamp (600W)
HTR1- ASSY (center)
Page
1/13
[Note]
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
Box (electric)
[Symbol]
Crimped connector
relay
Flat terminal
Male
Butt
Crimped connector
Female
Disconnected
Cutter cover open/close - [1/2]
Top cover open/close - [1/2]
INT3:Interlock SW
INT1:Interlock SW
LEDH
: LED head - [1/2]
Fixation door open/close - [1/2]
INT5:MS06-2
HDD cooling
BL05-3:Axis flow fan
HV-PS cooling
Cooling controller 2
BL05-2:Sirocco fan
BL05-4:Axis flow fan
Cooling controller 1 (board cover)
BL05-1:Sirocco fan
Page
2/13
E-3
E-4
[Note]
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
Box (electric)
[Symbol]
Crimped connector
Disconnected
Female
Crimped connector
relay
Male
Crimped connector
Connector color : Yellow
FUS01:Temp. fuse
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
: RIP board - [1/3]
Fuser unit
Paper feed unit
PCB-ASSY-MEC
: Engine controller board - [1/8]
Over protect
PCV-ASSY-RFU
: Paper feed unit - [1/4]
PM01
: DC servo motor - [1/2]
HV-PS
: High voltage power unit - [1/2]
Page
3/13
TH04: Thermistor
TH02: Thermistor
BL01: Sirocco fan
Fixation temp. (width)
Over heat protect
Suction duct
[Note]
TH01: Thermistor
(1:VCC.3:GND)
[Symbol]
PS07: Lever type photo 2
(1:VCC.3:GND)
(1:VCC.3:GND)
Crimped connector
Drawer connector
Female
Crimped connector
relay
Male
Crimped connector
INT4-5V: Drawer connector
(3:VCC.1:GND PS15)
PS15: Reflection type photo
Fixation temp. (center)
Paper ejection (fixation)
Fuser unit
Paper top edge pass (registration)
Paper transfer (suction part)
Manual feed detection 1
Guide (insertion/lower) unit
B side connector: Yellow
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC : Engine controller board 1
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Page
4/13
E-5
E-6
[Symbol]
[Note]
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Box (electric)
Crimped connector
relay
Crimped connector
Process cartridge
PCB-ASSY -PSCS
: Process cartridge board
PNL
: PL Control panel
Page
5/13
[Note]
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Box (electric)
[Symbol]
Flat terminal
Butt
Crimped connector
Crimped connector
relay
Male
Disconnected
Crimped connector
Female
Waste toner bottle
Manual tray open/close
Fixation door open/close - [2/2]
Cutter cover open/close - [2/2]
Top cover open/close - [2/2]
Waste toner bottle vibration
Discharge LED ON/OFF
Discharger upper right
Discharger upper center
Discharger upper left
Discharger upper (center)
Discharger upper (left)
Discharger upper (left)
MS05: Micro SW
MS07: Micro SW
INT5:MS06-1
INT3:Interlock SW
INT1:Interlock SW
BM01: DC motor
EL01: LED Alley
BL03R: Axis flow fan
BL03C: Axis flow fan
BL03L: Axis flow fan
BL02: Sirocco fan
BL06-1: Sirocco fan
BL06-2: Sirocco fan
Waste toner
TS02: Magnetic sensor
Page
6/13
E-7
E-8
[Note]
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Box (electric)
[Symbol]
Crimped connector
relay
Crimped connector
Male
Crimped connector
Female
HM01: Pulse motor
Development presence
or not
Developer toner stirrer
TS01 : Reflection sensor
GM01: Pulse motor
Manual feed ON/OFF
LED head temperature
Top cover open/close (L)
CL06: Magnetic clutch
TH03 : Thermistor
MS08 : Micro SW
Register roller ON/OFF
CL04: Magnetic clutch
(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
Toner cartridge
Developer unit
Heat roller rotation
MS04 : Micro SW
(1:/B, 2:B, 3:/A, 4:A)
Page
7/13
[Note]
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
[Symbol]
Crimped terminal
Flat terminal
Crimped connector
relay
HV-PS
: High voltage power unit - [2/2]
Crimped connector
High voltage wire : Use the UL3239 AWG#22.
Separator
Transfer
Paper feed unit
Process cartridge
Development
Discharge
LVPS(PSU-LSP)
PCB-ASSY-RFU
: Paper feed board - [2/4]
PM01
: DC servo motor - [2/2]
Page
8/13
E-9
E-10
Male
[Symbol]
Crimped connector
Female
PCB-ASSY-MEC
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
: RIP board - [2/3]

Page
9/13
[Symbol]
Male
Crimped connector
Female
Box (electric)
PCB-ASSY-MEC
LEDH
: LED head - [2/2]

Page
10/13
E-11
E-12
Male
[Symbol]
Crimped connector
Female
PCB-ASSY-USB2
: Optional board
PCB-ASSY-MRC2
: RIP board - [3/3]
Box (electric)
3.5' HDD
: Optional unit - [2/2]
PCB-ASSY-MRC2 : RIP board
Page
11/13
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
[Symbol]
PS30 : Lever type photo 1
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
[Note]
Paper width (A0) detection
CUTM : DC motor
RE02 : Micro switch
Slitter cutter left home
Cutter motor
RE01 : Micro switch
Slitter cutter right home
Box (electric)
Crimped connector
relay
Crimped connector
Male
Crimped connector
Female
PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper unit board 1
PCB-ASSY-RFU
: Paper unit board - [3/4]
Page
12/13
E-13
E-14
[Symbol]
PCB-ASSY-RFU
: Paper feed unit board - [4/4]
[Note]
Paper feed unit
Crimped connector
relay
Crimped connector
Male
Drawer connector
Crimped connector
Female
Roll 3 paper feed/rewind
Roll 3 presence or not
Door 3 ( bottom tray) open/close
Door 2 ( middle tray) open/close
Door 1 ( top tray) open/close
(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
TM01 : Pulse motor
PCB-ASSY-RFU : Paper unit board
Paper transfer on cutter
Motor side connector : 04KR-6S

Relay connector : BU04P-TR-P-H
(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
FM03 : Pulse motor
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
PS13 : Transparent type photo
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
FM02 : Pulse motor
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
(1:/B. 2:B. 3:/A. 4:A)
FM01 : Pulse motor
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
(1:VCC. 3:GND)
Page
13/13

Teriostar Maintenance Manual

Hochgeladen von

Dokumentinformationen

Originalbeschreibung:

Copyright

Verfügbare Formate

Dieses Dokument teilen

Dokument teilen oder einbetten

Freigabeoptionen

Stufen Sie dieses Dokument als nützlich ein?

Sind diese Inhalte unangemessen?

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

Teriostar Maintenance Manual

Hochgeladen von

Copyright:

Verfügbare Formate

LP-1010

Black-and-White Raster Plotter

Seiko I Infotech Inc.

Seiko I Infotech 2005, 2007

Serious personal injury or death:

Minor personal injury or product and/or peripheral

This symbol ( ) denotes items that are forbidden.

) denotes items you should follow to prevent accidents or

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

2a "Caution when dealing with

1 "Caution: high temperature" label

2b "Caution when dealing with paper jam" label

2 "Caution when dealing with paper jams" label

3 "WARNING: HIGH VOLTAGE" label

4 "Gas spring expiration date" label

Maintenance Work Procedure

1.1 Overview of Maintenance Work Procedure

1.2 Necessary Tools

1.3 External View and Nomenclatures

1.4 Maintenance Space

1.5 Version Upgrade of System Firmware

Engine Maintenance Mode

2.1 Overview of Engine Maintenance Mode Function and Operation

2.2 Maintenance and Diagnostic Menu

2.2.1 Operation for Select and Enter Oper2.3

Maintenance Code 06 "SENSOR" (Sensor)

Maintenance Person Mode

3.1 Enter to Maintenance Person Mode

3.2 Functions of Maintenance Person Mode Menus

3.3 How to turn on the maintenance person mode on Web

3.4 Maintenance Person's Special Web Functions

Troubleshooting (Controller Error)

5.1 Type of Error Messages

5.2 Troubleshooting Against Operator Call Error

5.3 Operator Notice Warning

5.5 Service Call Error

5.6 Error Log

5.7 Error Log Classification List

5.8 Job Log

5.9 Replacement of PCB-ASSY-MRC2 (Main Control Board)

5.10 Serial Number Unset

Troubleshooting (Engine Failure)

6.1 How to Read This Manual

6.2 Leve-1 Troubleshooting

6.3 Leve-2 Troubleshooting

Troubleshooting (Print Quality Failure)

7.1 Print Quality Troubleshooting Method

7.2 Troubleshooting in Case of a Plotting Specification Failure

7.3 Troubleshooting in Case of a Print Quality Failure

Replacing the Parts (Disassembly/Assembly)

8.2 Replacing the Parts

Replacing the High Voltage Power Unit

Replacing the backup roller

9.2 Verification and Adjustment Voltage of Low voltage Power Unit

9.3 Adjusting the Light Emitting STB Width of LED Head

9.4 Adjusting the Plotting Specification Items

9.5 Adjusting the Paper Top Edge Dead Space

9.6 Adjusting the LED Head Joint

Chapter 10 Operational Description

10.2 Engine Specifications

10.3 Paper Flow and Name of Each Part

10.4 Basic Operation (Overall Operation)

10.5 Electrophotographic Process Operation